1 /* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4: 2 * 3 * VIM - Vi IMproved by Bram Moolenaar 4 * 5 * Do ":help uganda" in Vim to read copying and usage conditions. 6 * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed. 7 * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code. 8 */ 9 10 /* 11 * misc1.c: functions that didn't seem to fit elsewhere 12 */ 13 14 #include "vim.h" 15 #include "version.h" 16 17 #ifdef HAVE_FCNTL_H 18 # include <fcntl.h> /* for chdir() */ 19 #endif 20 21 static char_u *vim_version_dir __ARGS((char_u *vimdir)); 22 static char_u *remove_tail __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *name)); 23 #if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X) 24 static char_u *remove_tail_with_ext __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *ext)); 25 #endif 26 static int copy_indent __ARGS((int size, char_u *src)); 27 28 /* 29 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in the current line. 30 */ 31 int 32 get_indent() 33 { 34 return get_indent_str(ml_get_curline(), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 35 } 36 37 /* 38 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum". 39 */ 40 int 41 get_indent_lnum(lnum) 42 linenr_T lnum; 43 { 44 return get_indent_str(ml_get(lnum), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 45 } 46 47 #if defined(FEAT_FOLDING) || defined(PROTO) 48 /* 49 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum" of buffer 50 * "buf". 51 */ 52 int 53 get_indent_buf(buf, lnum) 54 buf_T *buf; 55 linenr_T lnum; 56 { 57 return get_indent_str(ml_get_buf(buf, lnum, FALSE), (int)buf->b_p_ts); 58 } 59 #endif 60 61 /* 62 * count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "ptr", with 63 * 'tabstop' at "ts" 64 */ 65 int 66 get_indent_str(ptr, ts) 67 char_u *ptr; 68 int ts; 69 { 70 int count = 0; 71 72 for ( ; *ptr; ++ptr) 73 { 74 if (*ptr == TAB) /* count a tab for what it is worth */ 75 count += ts - (count % ts); 76 else if (*ptr == ' ') 77 ++count; /* count a space for one */ 78 else 79 break; 80 } 81 return count; 82 } 83 84 /* 85 * Set the indent of the current line. 86 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line. 87 * Caller must take care of undo. 88 * "flags": 89 * SIN_CHANGED: call changed_bytes() if the line was changed. 90 * SIN_INSERT: insert the indent in front of the line. 91 * SIN_UNDO: save line for undo before changing it. 92 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed. 93 */ 94 int 95 set_indent(size, flags) 96 int size; 97 int flags; 98 { 99 char_u *p; 100 char_u *newline; 101 char_u *oldline; 102 char_u *s; 103 int todo; 104 int ind_len; 105 int line_len; 106 int doit = FALSE; 107 int ind_done; 108 int tab_pad; 109 int retval = FALSE; 110 111 /* 112 * First check if there is anything to do and compute the number of 113 * characters needed for the indent. 114 */ 115 todo = size; 116 ind_len = 0; 117 p = oldline = ml_get_curline(); 118 119 /* Calculate the buffer size for the new indent, and check to see if it 120 * isn't already set */ 121 122 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */ 123 if (!curbuf->b_p_et) 124 { 125 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of 126 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */ 127 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi) 128 { 129 ind_done = 0; 130 131 /* count as many characters as we can use */ 132 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p)) 133 { 134 if (*p == TAB) 135 { 136 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts 137 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 138 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */ 139 if (todo < tab_pad) 140 break; 141 todo -= tab_pad; 142 ++ind_len; 143 ind_done += tab_pad; 144 } 145 else 146 { 147 --todo; 148 ++ind_len; 149 ++ind_done; 150 } 151 ++p; 152 } 153 154 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */ 155 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 156 if (todo >= tab_pad) 157 { 158 doit = TRUE; 159 todo -= tab_pad; 160 ++ind_len; 161 /* ind_done += tab_pad; */ 162 } 163 } 164 165 /* count tabs required for indent */ 166 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts) 167 { 168 if (*p != TAB) 169 doit = TRUE; 170 else 171 ++p; 172 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; 173 ++ind_len; 174 /* ind_done += (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; */ 175 } 176 } 177 /* count spaces required for indent */ 178 while (todo > 0) 179 { 180 if (*p != ' ') 181 doit = TRUE; 182 else 183 ++p; 184 --todo; 185 ++ind_len; 186 /* ++ind_done; */ 187 } 188 189 /* Return if the indent is OK already. */ 190 if (!doit && !vim_iswhite(*p) && !(flags & SIN_INSERT)) 191 return FALSE; 192 193 /* Allocate memory for the new line. */ 194 if (flags & SIN_INSERT) 195 p = oldline; 196 else 197 p = skipwhite(p); 198 line_len = (int)STRLEN(p) + 1; 199 newline = alloc(ind_len + line_len); 200 if (newline == NULL) 201 return FALSE; 202 203 /* Put the characters in the new line. */ 204 s = newline; 205 todo = size; 206 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */ 207 if (!curbuf->b_p_et) 208 { 209 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of 210 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */ 211 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi) 212 { 213 p = oldline; 214 ind_done = 0; 215 216 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p)) 217 { 218 if (*p == TAB) 219 { 220 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts 221 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 222 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */ 223 if (todo < tab_pad) 224 break; 225 todo -= tab_pad; 226 ind_done += tab_pad; 227 } 228 else 229 { 230 --todo; 231 ++ind_done; 232 } 233 *s++ = *p++; 234 } 235 236 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */ 237 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 238 if (todo >= tab_pad) 239 { 240 *s++ = TAB; 241 todo -= tab_pad; 242 } 243 244 p = skipwhite(p); 245 } 246 247 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts) 248 { 249 *s++ = TAB; 250 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; 251 } 252 } 253 while (todo > 0) 254 { 255 *s++ = ' '; 256 --todo; 257 } 258 mch_memmove(s, p, (size_t)line_len); 259 260 /* Replace the line (unless undo fails). */ 261 if (!(flags & SIN_UNDO) || u_savesub(curwin->w_cursor.lnum) == OK) 262 { 263 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, newline, FALSE); 264 if (flags & SIN_CHANGED) 265 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0); 266 /* Correct saved cursor position if it's after the indent. */ 267 if (saved_cursor.lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum 268 && saved_cursor.col >= (colnr_T)(p - oldline)) 269 saved_cursor.col += ind_len - (p - oldline); 270 retval = TRUE; 271 } 272 else 273 vim_free(newline); 274 275 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len; 276 return retval; 277 } 278 279 /* 280 * Copy the indent from ptr to the current line (and fill to size) 281 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line. 282 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed. 283 */ 284 static int 285 copy_indent(size, src) 286 int size; 287 char_u *src; 288 { 289 char_u *p = NULL; 290 char_u *line = NULL; 291 char_u *s; 292 int todo; 293 int ind_len; 294 int line_len = 0; 295 int tab_pad; 296 int ind_done; 297 int round; 298 299 /* Round 1: compute the number of characters needed for the indent 300 * Round 2: copy the characters. */ 301 for (round = 1; round <= 2; ++round) 302 { 303 todo = size; 304 ind_len = 0; 305 ind_done = 0; 306 s = src; 307 308 /* Count/copy the usable portion of the source line */ 309 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*s)) 310 { 311 if (*s == TAB) 312 { 313 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts 314 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 315 /* Stop if this tab will overshoot the target */ 316 if (todo < tab_pad) 317 break; 318 todo -= tab_pad; 319 ind_done += tab_pad; 320 } 321 else 322 { 323 --todo; 324 ++ind_done; 325 } 326 ++ind_len; 327 if (round == 2) 328 *p++ = *s; 329 ++s; 330 } 331 332 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */ 333 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 334 if (todo >= tab_pad) 335 { 336 todo -= tab_pad; 337 ++ind_len; 338 if (round == 2) 339 *p++ = TAB; 340 } 341 342 /* Add tabs required for indent */ 343 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts) 344 { 345 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; 346 ++ind_len; 347 if (round == 2) 348 *p++ = TAB; 349 } 350 351 /* Count/add spaces required for indent */ 352 while (todo > 0) 353 { 354 --todo; 355 ++ind_len; 356 if (round == 2) 357 *p++ = ' '; 358 } 359 360 if (round == 1) 361 { 362 /* Allocate memory for the result: the copied indent, new indent 363 * and the rest of the line. */ 364 line_len = (int)STRLEN(ml_get_curline()) + 1; 365 line = alloc(ind_len + line_len); 366 if (line == NULL) 367 return FALSE; 368 p = line; 369 } 370 } 371 372 /* Append the original line */ 373 mch_memmove(p, ml_get_curline(), (size_t)line_len); 374 375 /* Replace the line */ 376 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, line, FALSE); 377 378 /* Put the cursor after the indent. */ 379 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len; 380 return TRUE; 381 } 382 383 /* 384 * Return the indent of the current line after a number. Return -1 if no 385 * number was found. Used for 'n' in 'formatoptions': numbered list. 386 * Since a pattern is used it can actually handle more than numbers. 387 */ 388 int 389 get_number_indent(lnum) 390 linenr_T lnum; 391 { 392 colnr_T col; 393 pos_T pos; 394 regmmatch_T regmatch; 395 396 if (lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count) 397 return -1; 398 pos.lnum = 0; 399 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(curbuf->b_p_flp, RE_MAGIC); 400 if (regmatch.regprog != NULL) 401 { 402 regmatch.rmm_ic = FALSE; 403 regmatch.rmm_maxcol = 0; 404 if (vim_regexec_multi(®match, curwin, curbuf, lnum, (colnr_T)0)) 405 { 406 pos.lnum = regmatch.endpos[0].lnum + lnum; 407 pos.col = regmatch.endpos[0].col; 408 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 409 pos.coladd = 0; 410 #endif 411 } 412 vim_free(regmatch.regprog); 413 } 414 415 if (pos.lnum == 0 || *ml_get_pos(&pos) == NUL) 416 return -1; 417 getvcol(curwin, &pos, &col, NULL, NULL); 418 return (int)col; 419 } 420 421 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) 422 423 static int cin_is_cinword __ARGS((char_u *line)); 424 425 /* 426 * Return TRUE if the string "line" starts with a word from 'cinwords'. 427 */ 428 static int 429 cin_is_cinword(line) 430 char_u *line; 431 { 432 char_u *cinw; 433 char_u *cinw_buf; 434 int cinw_len; 435 int retval = FALSE; 436 int len; 437 438 cinw_len = (int)STRLEN(curbuf->b_p_cinw) + 1; 439 cinw_buf = alloc((unsigned)cinw_len); 440 if (cinw_buf != NULL) 441 { 442 line = skipwhite(line); 443 for (cinw = curbuf->b_p_cinw; *cinw; ) 444 { 445 len = copy_option_part(&cinw, cinw_buf, cinw_len, ","); 446 if (STRNCMP(line, cinw_buf, len) == 0 447 && (!vim_iswordc(line[len]) || !vim_iswordc(line[len - 1]))) 448 { 449 retval = TRUE; 450 break; 451 } 452 } 453 vim_free(cinw_buf); 454 } 455 return retval; 456 } 457 #endif 458 459 /* 460 * open_line: Add a new line below or above the current line. 461 * 462 * For VREPLACE mode, we only add a new line when we get to the end of the 463 * file, otherwise we just start replacing the next line. 464 * 465 * Caller must take care of undo. Since VREPLACE may affect any number of 466 * lines however, it may call u_save_cursor() again when starting to change a 467 * new line. 468 * "flags": OPENLINE_DELSPACES delete spaces after cursor 469 * OPENLINE_DO_COM format comments 470 * OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL keep trailing spaces 471 * OPENLINE_MARKFIX adjust mark positions after the line break 472 * 473 * Return TRUE for success, FALSE for failure 474 */ 475 int 476 open_line(dir, flags, old_indent) 477 int dir; /* FORWARD or BACKWARD */ 478 int flags; 479 int old_indent; /* indent for after ^^D in Insert mode */ 480 { 481 char_u *saved_line; /* copy of the original line */ 482 char_u *next_line = NULL; /* copy of the next line */ 483 char_u *p_extra = NULL; /* what goes to next line */ 484 int less_cols = 0; /* less columns for mark in new line */ 485 int less_cols_off = 0; /* columns to skip for mark adjust */ 486 pos_T old_cursor; /* old cursor position */ 487 int newcol = 0; /* new cursor column */ 488 int newindent = 0; /* auto-indent of the new line */ 489 int n; 490 int trunc_line = FALSE; /* truncate current line afterwards */ 491 int retval = FALSE; /* return value, default is FAIL */ 492 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 493 int extra_len = 0; /* length of p_extra string */ 494 int lead_len; /* length of comment leader */ 495 char_u *lead_flags; /* position in 'comments' for comment leader */ 496 char_u *leader = NULL; /* copy of comment leader */ 497 #endif 498 char_u *allocated = NULL; /* allocated memory */ 499 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_LISP) \ 500 || defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) 501 char_u *p; 502 #endif 503 int saved_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */ 504 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) 505 pos_T *pos; 506 #endif 507 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 508 int do_si = (!p_paste && curbuf->b_p_si 509 # ifdef FEAT_CINDENT 510 && !curbuf->b_p_cin 511 # endif 512 ); 513 int no_si = FALSE; /* reset did_si afterwards */ 514 int first_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */ 515 #endif 516 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT)) 517 int vreplace_mode; 518 #endif 519 int did_append; /* appended a new line */ 520 int saved_pi = curbuf->b_p_pi; /* copy of preserveindent setting */ 521 522 /* 523 * make a copy of the current line so we can mess with it 524 */ 525 saved_line = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline()); 526 if (saved_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */ 527 return FALSE; 528 529 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 530 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 531 { 532 /* 533 * With VREPLACE we make a copy of the next line, which we will be 534 * starting to replace. First make the new line empty and let vim play 535 * with the indenting and comment leader to its heart's content. Then 536 * we grab what it ended up putting on the new line, put back the 537 * original line, and call ins_char() to put each new character onto 538 * the line, replacing what was there before and pushing the right 539 * stuff onto the replace stack. -- webb. 540 */ 541 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum < orig_line_count) 542 next_line = vim_strsave(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1)); 543 else 544 next_line = vim_strsave((char_u *)""); 545 if (next_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */ 546 goto theend; 547 548 /* 549 * In VREPLACE mode, a NL replaces the rest of the line, and starts 550 * replacing the next line, so push all of the characters left on the 551 * line onto the replace stack. We'll push any other characters that 552 * might be replaced at the start of the next line (due to autoindent 553 * etc) a bit later. 554 */ 555 replace_push(NUL); /* Call twice because BS over NL expects it */ 556 replace_push(NUL); 557 p = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col; 558 while (*p != NUL) 559 replace_push(*p++); 560 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL; 561 } 562 #endif 563 564 if ((State & INSERT) 565 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 566 && !(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 567 #endif 568 ) 569 { 570 p_extra = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col; 571 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 572 if (do_si) /* need first char after new line break */ 573 { 574 p = skipwhite(p_extra); 575 first_char = *p; 576 } 577 #endif 578 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 579 extra_len = (int)STRLEN(p_extra); 580 #endif 581 saved_char = *p_extra; 582 *p_extra = NUL; 583 } 584 585 u_clearline(); /* cannot do "U" command when adding lines */ 586 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 587 did_si = FALSE; 588 #endif 589 ai_col = 0; 590 591 /* 592 * If we just did an auto-indent, then we didn't type anything on 593 * the prior line, and it should be truncated. Do this even if 'ai' is not 594 * set because automatically inserting a comment leader also sets did_ai. 595 */ 596 if (dir == FORWARD && did_ai) 597 trunc_line = TRUE; 598 599 /* 600 * If 'autoindent' and/or 'smartindent' is set, try to figure out what 601 * indent to use for the new line. 602 */ 603 if (curbuf->b_p_ai 604 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 605 || do_si 606 #endif 607 ) 608 { 609 /* 610 * count white space on current line 611 */ 612 newindent = get_indent_str(saved_line, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 613 if (newindent == 0) 614 newindent = old_indent; /* for ^^D command in insert mode */ 615 616 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 617 /* 618 * Do smart indenting. 619 * In insert/replace mode (only when dir == FORWARD) 620 * we may move some text to the next line. If it starts with '{' 621 * don't add an indent. Fixes inserting a NL before '{' in line 622 * "if (condition) {" 623 */ 624 if (!trunc_line && do_si && *saved_line != NUL 625 && (p_extra == NULL || first_char != '{')) 626 { 627 char_u *ptr; 628 char_u last_char; 629 630 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor; 631 ptr = saved_line; 632 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 633 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM) 634 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE); 635 else 636 lead_len = 0; 637 # endif 638 if (dir == FORWARD) 639 { 640 /* 641 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are 642 * recognised as comments. 643 */ 644 if ( 645 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 646 lead_len == 0 && 647 # endif 648 ptr[0] == '#') 649 { 650 while (ptr[0] == '#' && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 651 ptr = ml_get(--curwin->w_cursor.lnum); 652 newindent = get_indent(); 653 } 654 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 655 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM) 656 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE); 657 else 658 lead_len = 0; 659 if (lead_len > 0) 660 { 661 /* 662 * This case gets the following right: 663 * \* 664 * * A comment (read '\' as '/'). 665 * *\ 666 * #define IN_THE_WAY 667 * This should line up here; 668 */ 669 p = skipwhite(ptr); 670 if (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '*') 671 p++; 672 if (p[0] == '*') 673 { 674 for (p++; *p; p++) 675 { 676 if (p[0] == '/' && p[-1] == '*') 677 { 678 /* 679 * End of C comment, indent should line up 680 * with the line containing the start of 681 * the comment 682 */ 683 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr); 684 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL) 685 { 686 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 687 newindent = get_indent(); 688 } 689 } 690 } 691 } 692 } 693 else /* Not a comment line */ 694 # endif 695 { 696 /* Find last non-blank in line */ 697 p = ptr + STRLEN(ptr) - 1; 698 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p)) 699 --p; 700 last_char = *p; 701 702 /* 703 * find the character just before the '{' or ';' 704 */ 705 if (last_char == '{' || last_char == ';') 706 { 707 if (p > ptr) 708 --p; 709 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p)) 710 --p; 711 } 712 /* 713 * Try to catch lines that are split over multiple 714 * lines. eg: 715 * if (condition && 716 * condition) { 717 * Should line up here! 718 * } 719 */ 720 if (*p == ')') 721 { 722 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr); 723 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) != NULL) 724 { 725 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 726 newindent = get_indent(); 727 ptr = ml_get_curline(); 728 } 729 } 730 /* 731 * If last character is '{' do indent, without 732 * checking for "if" and the like. 733 */ 734 if (last_char == '{') 735 { 736 did_si = TRUE; /* do indent */ 737 no_si = TRUE; /* don't delete it when '{' typed */ 738 } 739 /* 740 * Look for "if" and the like, use 'cinwords'. 741 * Don't do this if the previous line ended in ';' or 742 * '}'. 743 */ 744 else if (last_char != ';' && last_char != '}' 745 && cin_is_cinword(ptr)) 746 did_si = TRUE; 747 } 748 } 749 else /* dir == BACKWARD */ 750 { 751 /* 752 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are 753 * recognised as comments. 754 */ 755 if ( 756 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 757 lead_len == 0 && 758 # endif 759 ptr[0] == '#') 760 { 761 int was_backslashed = FALSE; 762 763 while ((ptr[0] == '#' || was_backslashed) && 764 curwin->w_cursor.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count) 765 { 766 if (*ptr && ptr[STRLEN(ptr) - 1] == '\\') 767 was_backslashed = TRUE; 768 else 769 was_backslashed = FALSE; 770 ptr = ml_get(++curwin->w_cursor.lnum); 771 } 772 if (was_backslashed) 773 newindent = 0; /* Got to end of file */ 774 else 775 newindent = get_indent(); 776 } 777 p = skipwhite(ptr); 778 if (*p == '}') /* if line starts with '}': do indent */ 779 did_si = TRUE; 780 else /* can delete indent when '{' typed */ 781 can_si_back = TRUE; 782 } 783 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor; 784 } 785 if (do_si) 786 can_si = TRUE; 787 #endif /* FEAT_SMARTINDENT */ 788 789 did_ai = TRUE; 790 } 791 792 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 793 /* 794 * Find out if the current line starts with a comment leader. 795 * This may then be inserted in front of the new line. 796 */ 797 end_comment_pending = NUL; 798 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM) 799 lead_len = get_leader_len(saved_line, &lead_flags, dir == BACKWARD); 800 else 801 lead_len = 0; 802 if (lead_len > 0) 803 { 804 char_u *lead_repl = NULL; /* replaces comment leader */ 805 int lead_repl_len = 0; /* length of *lead_repl */ 806 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */ 807 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */ 808 char_u *comment_end = NULL; /* where lead_end has been found */ 809 int extra_space = FALSE; /* append extra space */ 810 int current_flag; 811 int require_blank = FALSE; /* requires blank after middle */ 812 char_u *p2; 813 814 /* 815 * If the comment leader has the start, middle or end flag, it may not 816 * be used or may be replaced with the middle leader. 817 */ 818 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p) 819 { 820 if (*p == COM_BLANK) 821 { 822 require_blank = TRUE; 823 continue; 824 } 825 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_MIDDLE) 826 { 827 current_flag = *p; 828 if (*p == COM_START) 829 { 830 /* 831 * Doing "O" on a start of comment does not insert leader. 832 */ 833 if (dir == BACKWARD) 834 { 835 lead_len = 0; 836 break; 837 } 838 839 /* find start of middle part */ 840 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 841 require_blank = FALSE; 842 } 843 844 /* 845 * Isolate the strings of the middle and end leader. 846 */ 847 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of middle flags */ 848 { 849 if (*p == COM_BLANK) 850 require_blank = TRUE; 851 ++p; 852 } 853 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 854 855 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of end flags */ 856 { 857 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */ 858 if (*p == COM_AUTO_END) 859 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */ 860 ++p; 861 } 862 n = copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 863 864 if (end_comment_pending == -1) /* we can set it now */ 865 end_comment_pending = lead_end[n - 1]; 866 867 /* 868 * If the end of the comment is in the same line, don't use 869 * the comment leader. 870 */ 871 if (dir == FORWARD) 872 { 873 for (p = saved_line + lead_len; *p; ++p) 874 if (STRNCMP(p, lead_end, n) == 0) 875 { 876 comment_end = p; 877 lead_len = 0; 878 break; 879 } 880 } 881 882 /* 883 * Doing "o" on a start of comment inserts the middle leader. 884 */ 885 if (lead_len > 0) 886 { 887 if (current_flag == COM_START) 888 { 889 lead_repl = lead_middle; 890 lead_repl_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle); 891 } 892 893 /* 894 * If we have hit RETURN immediately after the start 895 * comment leader, then put a space after the middle 896 * comment leader on the next line. 897 */ 898 if (!vim_iswhite(saved_line[lead_len - 1]) 899 && ((p_extra != NULL 900 && (int)curwin->w_cursor.col == lead_len) 901 || (p_extra == NULL 902 && saved_line[lead_len] == NUL) 903 || require_blank)) 904 extra_space = TRUE; 905 } 906 break; 907 } 908 if (*p == COM_END) 909 { 910 /* 911 * Doing "o" on the end of a comment does not insert leader. 912 * Remember where the end is, might want to use it to find the 913 * start (for C-comments). 914 */ 915 if (dir == FORWARD) 916 { 917 comment_end = skipwhite(saved_line); 918 lead_len = 0; 919 break; 920 } 921 922 /* 923 * Doing "O" on the end of a comment inserts the middle leader. 924 * Find the string for the middle leader, searching backwards. 925 */ 926 while (p > curbuf->b_p_com && *p != ',') 927 --p; 928 for (lead_repl = p; lead_repl > curbuf->b_p_com 929 && lead_repl[-1] != ':'; --lead_repl) 930 ; 931 lead_repl_len = (int)(p - lead_repl); 932 933 /* We can probably always add an extra space when doing "O" on 934 * the comment-end */ 935 extra_space = TRUE; 936 937 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */ 938 for (p2 = p; *p2 && *p2 != ':'; p2++) 939 { 940 if (*p2 == COM_AUTO_END) 941 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */ 942 } 943 if (end_comment_pending == -1) 944 { 945 /* Find last character in end-comment string */ 946 while (*p2 && *p2 != ',') 947 p2++; 948 end_comment_pending = p2[-1]; 949 } 950 break; 951 } 952 if (*p == COM_FIRST) 953 { 954 /* 955 * Comment leader for first line only: Don't repeat leader 956 * when using "O", blank out leader when using "o". 957 */ 958 if (dir == BACKWARD) 959 lead_len = 0; 960 else 961 { 962 lead_repl = (char_u *)""; 963 lead_repl_len = 0; 964 } 965 break; 966 } 967 } 968 if (lead_len) 969 { 970 /* allocate buffer (may concatenate p_exta later) */ 971 leader = alloc(lead_len + lead_repl_len + extra_space + 972 extra_len + 1); 973 allocated = leader; /* remember to free it later */ 974 975 if (leader == NULL) 976 lead_len = 0; 977 else 978 { 979 vim_strncpy(leader, saved_line, lead_len); 980 981 /* 982 * Replace leader with lead_repl, right or left adjusted 983 */ 984 if (lead_repl != NULL) 985 { 986 int c = 0; 987 int off = 0; 988 989 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p) 990 { 991 if (*p == COM_RIGHT || *p == COM_LEFT) 992 c = *p; 993 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-') 994 off = getdigits(&p); 995 } 996 if (c == COM_RIGHT) /* right adjusted leader */ 997 { 998 /* find last non-white in the leader to line up with */ 999 for (p = leader + lead_len - 1; p > leader 1000 && vim_iswhite(*p); --p) 1001 ; 1002 ++p; 1003 1004 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1005 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in 1006 * screen characters, not bytes. */ 1007 { 1008 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl, 1009 lead_repl_len); 1010 int old_size = 0; 1011 char_u *endp = p; 1012 int l; 1013 1014 while (old_size < repl_size && p > leader) 1015 { 1016 mb_ptr_back(leader, p); 1017 old_size += ptr2cells(p); 1018 } 1019 l = lead_repl_len - (endp - p); 1020 if (l != 0) 1021 mch_memmove(endp + l, endp, 1022 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - endp)); 1023 lead_len += l; 1024 } 1025 #else 1026 if (p < leader + lead_repl_len) 1027 p = leader; 1028 else 1029 p -= lead_repl_len; 1030 #endif 1031 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len); 1032 if (p + lead_repl_len > leader + lead_len) 1033 p[lead_repl_len] = NUL; 1034 1035 /* blank-out any other chars from the old leader. */ 1036 while (--p >= leader) 1037 { 1038 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1039 int l = mb_head_off(leader, p); 1040 1041 if (l > 1) 1042 { 1043 p -= l; 1044 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1) 1045 { 1046 p[1] = ' '; 1047 --l; 1048 } 1049 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l + 1, 1050 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - (p + l + 1))); 1051 lead_len -= l; 1052 *p = ' '; 1053 } 1054 else 1055 #endif 1056 if (!vim_iswhite(*p)) 1057 *p = ' '; 1058 } 1059 } 1060 else /* left adjusted leader */ 1061 { 1062 p = skipwhite(leader); 1063 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1064 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in 1065 * screen characters, not bytes. Move the part that is 1066 * not to be overwritten. */ 1067 { 1068 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl, 1069 lead_repl_len); 1070 int i; 1071 int l; 1072 1073 for (i = 0; p[i] != NUL && i < lead_len; i += l) 1074 { 1075 l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i); 1076 if (vim_strnsize(p, i + l) > repl_size) 1077 break; 1078 } 1079 if (i != lead_repl_len) 1080 { 1081 mch_memmove(p + lead_repl_len, p + i, 1082 (size_t)(lead_len - i - (leader - p))); 1083 lead_len += lead_repl_len - i; 1084 } 1085 } 1086 #endif 1087 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len); 1088 1089 /* Replace any remaining non-white chars in the old 1090 * leader by spaces. Keep Tabs, the indent must 1091 * remain the same. */ 1092 for (p += lead_repl_len; p < leader + lead_len; ++p) 1093 if (!vim_iswhite(*p)) 1094 { 1095 /* Don't put a space before a TAB. */ 1096 if (p + 1 < leader + lead_len && p[1] == TAB) 1097 { 1098 --lead_len; 1099 mch_memmove(p, p + 1, 1100 (leader + lead_len) - p); 1101 } 1102 else 1103 { 1104 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1105 int l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p); 1106 1107 if (l > 1) 1108 { 1109 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1) 1110 { 1111 /* Replace a double-wide char with 1112 * two spaces */ 1113 --l; 1114 *p++ = ' '; 1115 } 1116 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l, 1117 (leader + lead_len) - p); 1118 lead_len -= l - 1; 1119 } 1120 #endif 1121 *p = ' '; 1122 } 1123 } 1124 *p = NUL; 1125 } 1126 1127 /* Recompute the indent, it may have changed. */ 1128 if (curbuf->b_p_ai 1129 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1130 || do_si 1131 #endif 1132 ) 1133 newindent = get_indent_str(leader, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 1134 1135 /* Add the indent offset */ 1136 if (newindent + off < 0) 1137 { 1138 off = -newindent; 1139 newindent = 0; 1140 } 1141 else 1142 newindent += off; 1143 1144 /* Correct trailing spaces for the shift, so that 1145 * alignment remains equal. */ 1146 while (off > 0 && lead_len > 0 1147 && leader[lead_len - 1] == ' ') 1148 { 1149 /* Don't do it when there is a tab before the space */ 1150 if (vim_strchr(skipwhite(leader), '\t') != NULL) 1151 break; 1152 --lead_len; 1153 --off; 1154 } 1155 1156 /* If the leader ends in white space, don't add an 1157 * extra space */ 1158 if (lead_len > 0 && vim_iswhite(leader[lead_len - 1])) 1159 extra_space = FALSE; 1160 leader[lead_len] = NUL; 1161 } 1162 1163 if (extra_space) 1164 { 1165 leader[lead_len++] = ' '; 1166 leader[lead_len] = NUL; 1167 } 1168 1169 newcol = lead_len; 1170 1171 /* 1172 * if a new indent will be set below, remove the indent that 1173 * is in the comment leader 1174 */ 1175 if (newindent 1176 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1177 || did_si 1178 #endif 1179 ) 1180 { 1181 while (lead_len && vim_iswhite(*leader)) 1182 { 1183 --lead_len; 1184 --newcol; 1185 ++leader; 1186 } 1187 } 1188 1189 } 1190 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1191 did_si = can_si = FALSE; 1192 #endif 1193 } 1194 else if (comment_end != NULL) 1195 { 1196 /* 1197 * We have finished a comment, so we don't use the leader. 1198 * If this was a C-comment and 'ai' or 'si' is set do a normal 1199 * indent to align with the line containing the start of the 1200 * comment. 1201 */ 1202 if (comment_end[0] == '*' && comment_end[1] == '/' && 1203 (curbuf->b_p_ai 1204 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1205 || do_si 1206 #endif 1207 )) 1208 { 1209 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor; 1210 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(comment_end - saved_line); 1211 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL) 1212 { 1213 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 1214 newindent = get_indent(); 1215 } 1216 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor; 1217 } 1218 } 1219 } 1220 #endif 1221 1222 /* (State == INSERT || State == REPLACE), only when dir == FORWARD */ 1223 if (p_extra != NULL) 1224 { 1225 *p_extra = saved_char; /* restore char that NUL replaced */ 1226 1227 /* 1228 * When 'ai' set or "flags" has OPENLINE_DELSPACES, skip to the first 1229 * non-blank. 1230 * 1231 * When in REPLACE mode, put the deleted blanks on the replace stack, 1232 * preceded by a NUL, so they can be put back when a BS is entered. 1233 */ 1234 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State)) 1235 replace_push(NUL); /* end of extra blanks */ 1236 if (curbuf->b_p_ai || (flags & OPENLINE_DELSPACES)) 1237 { 1238 while ((*p_extra == ' ' || *p_extra == '\t') 1239 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1240 && (!enc_utf8 1241 || !utf_iscomposing(utf_ptr2char(p_extra + 1))) 1242 #endif 1243 ) 1244 { 1245 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State)) 1246 replace_push(*p_extra); 1247 ++p_extra; 1248 ++less_cols_off; 1249 } 1250 } 1251 if (*p_extra != NUL) 1252 did_ai = FALSE; /* append some text, don't truncate now */ 1253 1254 /* columns for marks adjusted for removed columns */ 1255 less_cols = (int)(p_extra - saved_line); 1256 } 1257 1258 if (p_extra == NULL) 1259 p_extra = (char_u *)""; /* append empty line */ 1260 1261 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 1262 /* concatenate leader and p_extra, if there is a leader */ 1263 if (lead_len) 1264 { 1265 STRCAT(leader, p_extra); 1266 p_extra = leader; 1267 did_ai = TRUE; /* So truncating blanks works with comments */ 1268 less_cols -= lead_len; 1269 } 1270 else 1271 end_comment_pending = NUL; /* turns out there was no leader */ 1272 #endif 1273 1274 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor; 1275 if (dir == BACKWARD) 1276 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 1277 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 1278 if (!(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) || old_cursor.lnum >= orig_line_count) 1279 #endif 1280 { 1281 if (ml_append(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, (colnr_T)0, FALSE) 1282 == FAIL) 1283 goto theend; 1284 /* Postpone calling changed_lines(), because it would mess up folding 1285 * with markers. */ 1286 mark_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, 1L, 0L); 1287 did_append = TRUE; 1288 } 1289 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 1290 else 1291 { 1292 /* 1293 * In VREPLACE mode we are starting to replace the next line. 1294 */ 1295 curwin->w_cursor.lnum++; 1296 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= Insstart.lnum + vr_lines_changed) 1297 { 1298 /* In case we NL to a new line, BS to the previous one, and NL 1299 * again, we don't want to save the new line for undo twice. 1300 */ 1301 (void)u_save_cursor(); /* errors are ignored! */ 1302 vr_lines_changed++; 1303 } 1304 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, TRUE); 1305 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0); 1306 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--; 1307 did_append = FALSE; 1308 } 1309 #endif 1310 1311 if (newindent 1312 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1313 || did_si 1314 #endif 1315 ) 1316 { 1317 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 1318 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1319 if (did_si) 1320 { 1321 if (p_sr) 1322 newindent -= newindent % (int)curbuf->b_p_sw; 1323 newindent += (int)curbuf->b_p_sw; 1324 } 1325 #endif 1326 /* Copy the indent only if expand tab is disabled */ 1327 if (curbuf->b_p_ci && !curbuf->b_p_et) 1328 { 1329 (void)copy_indent(newindent, saved_line); 1330 1331 /* 1332 * Set the 'preserveindent' option so that any further screwing 1333 * with the line doesn't entirely destroy our efforts to preserve 1334 * it. It gets restored at the function end. 1335 */ 1336 curbuf->b_p_pi = TRUE; 1337 } 1338 else 1339 (void)set_indent(newindent, SIN_INSERT); 1340 less_cols -= curwin->w_cursor.col; 1341 1342 ai_col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 1343 1344 /* 1345 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the new indent, there must 1346 * be a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS 1347 */ 1348 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State)) 1349 for (n = 0; n < (int)curwin->w_cursor.col; ++n) 1350 replace_push(NUL); 1351 newcol += curwin->w_cursor.col; 1352 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1353 if (no_si) 1354 did_si = FALSE; 1355 #endif 1356 } 1357 1358 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 1359 /* 1360 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the extra leader, there must be 1361 * a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS. 1362 */ 1363 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State)) 1364 while (lead_len-- > 0) 1365 replace_push(NUL); 1366 #endif 1367 1368 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor; 1369 1370 if (dir == FORWARD) 1371 { 1372 if (trunc_line || (State & INSERT)) 1373 { 1374 /* truncate current line at cursor */ 1375 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL; 1376 /* Remove trailing white space, unless OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL used. */ 1377 if (trunc_line && !(flags & OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL)) 1378 truncate_spaces(saved_line); 1379 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, saved_line, FALSE); 1380 saved_line = NULL; 1381 if (did_append) 1382 { 1383 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col, 1384 curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, 1L); 1385 did_append = FALSE; 1386 1387 /* Move marks after the line break to the new line. */ 1388 if (flags & OPENLINE_MARKFIX) 1389 mark_col_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1390 curwin->w_cursor.col + less_cols_off, 1391 1L, (long)-less_cols); 1392 } 1393 else 1394 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col); 1395 } 1396 1397 /* 1398 * Put the cursor on the new line. Careful: the scrollup() above may 1399 * have moved w_cursor, we must use old_cursor. 1400 */ 1401 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = old_cursor.lnum + 1; 1402 } 1403 if (did_append) 1404 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1L); 1405 1406 curwin->w_cursor.col = newcol; 1407 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 1408 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0; 1409 #endif 1410 1411 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT)) 1412 /* 1413 * In VREPLACE mode, we are handling the replace stack ourselves, so stop 1414 * fixthisline() from doing it (via change_indent()) by telling it we're in 1415 * normal INSERT mode. 1416 */ 1417 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 1418 { 1419 vreplace_mode = State; /* So we know to put things right later */ 1420 State = INSERT; 1421 } 1422 else 1423 vreplace_mode = 0; 1424 #endif 1425 #ifdef FEAT_LISP 1426 /* 1427 * May do lisp indenting. 1428 */ 1429 if (!p_paste 1430 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 1431 && leader == NULL 1432 # endif 1433 && curbuf->b_p_lisp 1434 && curbuf->b_p_ai) 1435 { 1436 fixthisline(get_lisp_indent); 1437 p = ml_get_curline(); 1438 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p); 1439 } 1440 #endif 1441 #ifdef FEAT_CINDENT 1442 /* 1443 * May do indenting after opening a new line. 1444 */ 1445 if (!p_paste 1446 && (curbuf->b_p_cin 1447 # ifdef FEAT_EVAL 1448 || *curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL 1449 # endif 1450 ) 1451 && in_cinkeys(dir == FORWARD 1452 ? KEY_OPEN_FORW 1453 : KEY_OPEN_BACK, ' ', linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum))) 1454 { 1455 do_c_expr_indent(); 1456 p = ml_get_curline(); 1457 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p); 1458 } 1459 #endif 1460 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT)) 1461 if (vreplace_mode != 0) 1462 State = vreplace_mode; 1463 #endif 1464 1465 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 1466 /* 1467 * Finally, VREPLACE gets the stuff on the new line, then puts back the 1468 * original line, and inserts the new stuff char by char, pushing old stuff 1469 * onto the replace stack (via ins_char()). 1470 */ 1471 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 1472 { 1473 /* Put new line in p_extra */ 1474 p_extra = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline()); 1475 if (p_extra == NULL) 1476 goto theend; 1477 1478 /* Put back original line */ 1479 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, next_line, FALSE); 1480 1481 /* Insert new stuff into line again */ 1482 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 1483 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 1484 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0; 1485 #endif 1486 ins_bytes(p_extra); /* will call changed_bytes() */ 1487 vim_free(p_extra); 1488 next_line = NULL; 1489 } 1490 #endif 1491 1492 retval = TRUE; /* success! */ 1493 theend: 1494 curbuf->b_p_pi = saved_pi; 1495 vim_free(saved_line); 1496 vim_free(next_line); 1497 vim_free(allocated); 1498 return retval; 1499 } 1500 1501 #if defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(PROTO) 1502 /* 1503 * get_leader_len() returns the length of the prefix of the given string 1504 * which introduces a comment. If this string is not a comment then 0 is 1505 * returned. 1506 * When "flags" is not NULL, it is set to point to the flags of the recognized 1507 * comment leader. 1508 * "backward" must be true for the "O" command. 1509 */ 1510 int 1511 get_leader_len(line, flags, backward) 1512 char_u *line; 1513 char_u **flags; 1514 int backward; 1515 { 1516 int i, j; 1517 int got_com = FALSE; 1518 int found_one; 1519 char_u part_buf[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* buffer for one option part */ 1520 char_u *string; /* pointer to comment string */ 1521 char_u *list; 1522 1523 i = 0; 1524 while (vim_iswhite(line[i])) /* leading white space is ignored */ 1525 ++i; 1526 1527 /* 1528 * Repeat to match several nested comment strings. 1529 */ 1530 while (line[i]) 1531 { 1532 /* 1533 * scan through the 'comments' option for a match 1534 */ 1535 found_one = FALSE; 1536 for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; ) 1537 { 1538 /* 1539 * Get one option part into part_buf[]. Advance list to next one. 1540 * put string at start of string. 1541 */ 1542 if (!got_com && flags != NULL) /* remember where flags started */ 1543 *flags = list; 1544 (void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 1545 string = vim_strchr(part_buf, ':'); 1546 if (string == NULL) /* missing ':', ignore this part */ 1547 continue; 1548 *string++ = NUL; /* isolate flags from string */ 1549 1550 /* 1551 * When already found a nested comment, only accept further 1552 * nested comments. 1553 */ 1554 if (got_com && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL) 1555 continue; 1556 1557 /* When 'O' flag used don't use for "O" command */ 1558 if (backward && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NOBACK) != NULL) 1559 continue; 1560 1561 /* 1562 * Line contents and string must match. 1563 * When string starts with white space, must have some white space 1564 * (but the amount does not need to match, there might be a mix of 1565 * TABs and spaces). 1566 */ 1567 if (vim_iswhite(string[0])) 1568 { 1569 if (i == 0 || !vim_iswhite(line[i - 1])) 1570 continue; 1571 while (vim_iswhite(string[0])) 1572 ++string; 1573 } 1574 for (j = 0; string[j] != NUL && string[j] == line[i + j]; ++j) 1575 ; 1576 if (string[j] != NUL) 1577 continue; 1578 1579 /* 1580 * When 'b' flag used, there must be white space or an 1581 * end-of-line after the string in the line. 1582 */ 1583 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_BLANK) != NULL 1584 && !vim_iswhite(line[i + j]) && line[i + j] != NUL) 1585 continue; 1586 1587 /* 1588 * We have found a match, stop searching. 1589 */ 1590 i += j; 1591 got_com = TRUE; 1592 found_one = TRUE; 1593 break; 1594 } 1595 1596 /* 1597 * No match found, stop scanning. 1598 */ 1599 if (!found_one) 1600 break; 1601 1602 /* 1603 * Include any trailing white space. 1604 */ 1605 while (vim_iswhite(line[i])) 1606 ++i; 1607 1608 /* 1609 * If this comment doesn't nest, stop here. 1610 */ 1611 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL) 1612 break; 1613 } 1614 return (got_com ? i : 0); 1615 } 1616 #endif 1617 1618 /* 1619 * Return the number of window lines occupied by buffer line "lnum". 1620 */ 1621 int 1622 plines(lnum) 1623 linenr_T lnum; 1624 { 1625 return plines_win(curwin, lnum, TRUE); 1626 } 1627 1628 int 1629 plines_win(wp, lnum, winheight) 1630 win_T *wp; 1631 linenr_T lnum; 1632 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */ 1633 { 1634 #if defined(FEAT_DIFF) || defined(PROTO) 1635 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result 1636 * is one line anyway. */ 1637 return plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) + diff_check_fill(wp, lnum); 1638 } 1639 1640 int 1641 plines_nofill(lnum) 1642 linenr_T lnum; 1643 { 1644 return plines_win_nofill(curwin, lnum, TRUE); 1645 } 1646 1647 int 1648 plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) 1649 win_T *wp; 1650 linenr_T lnum; 1651 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */ 1652 { 1653 #endif 1654 int lines; 1655 1656 if (!wp->w_p_wrap) 1657 return 1; 1658 1659 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT 1660 if (wp->w_width == 0) 1661 return 1; 1662 #endif 1663 1664 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 1665 /* A folded lines is handled just like an empty line. */ 1666 /* NOTE: Caller must handle lines that are MAYBE folded. */ 1667 if (lineFolded(wp, lnum) == TRUE) 1668 return 1; 1669 #endif 1670 1671 lines = plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum); 1672 if (winheight > 0 && lines > wp->w_height) 1673 return (int)wp->w_height; 1674 return lines; 1675 } 1676 1677 /* 1678 * Return number of window lines physical line "lnum" will occupy in window 1679 * "wp". Does not care about folding, 'wrap' or 'diff'. 1680 */ 1681 int 1682 plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum) 1683 win_T *wp; 1684 linenr_T lnum; 1685 { 1686 char_u *s; 1687 long col; 1688 int width; 1689 1690 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE); 1691 if (*s == NUL) /* empty line */ 1692 return 1; 1693 col = win_linetabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)MAXCOL); 1694 1695 /* 1696 * If list mode is on, then the '$' at the end of the line may take up one 1697 * extra column. 1698 */ 1699 if (wp->w_p_list && lcs_eol != NUL) 1700 col += 1; 1701 1702 /* 1703 * Add column offset for 'number' and 'foldcolumn'. 1704 */ 1705 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp); 1706 if (width <= 0) 1707 return 32000; 1708 if (col <= width) 1709 return 1; 1710 col -= width; 1711 width += win_col_off2(wp); 1712 return (col + (width - 1)) / width + 1; 1713 } 1714 1715 /* 1716 * Like plines_win(), but only reports the number of physical screen lines 1717 * used from the start of the line to the given column number. 1718 */ 1719 int 1720 plines_win_col(wp, lnum, column) 1721 win_T *wp; 1722 linenr_T lnum; 1723 long column; 1724 { 1725 long col; 1726 char_u *s; 1727 int lines = 0; 1728 int width; 1729 1730 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF 1731 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result 1732 * is one line anyway. */ 1733 lines = diff_check_fill(wp, lnum); 1734 #endif 1735 1736 if (!wp->w_p_wrap) 1737 return lines + 1; 1738 1739 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT 1740 if (wp->w_width == 0) 1741 return lines + 1; 1742 #endif 1743 1744 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE); 1745 1746 col = 0; 1747 while (*s != NUL && --column >= 0) 1748 { 1749 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL); 1750 mb_ptr_adv(s); 1751 } 1752 1753 /* 1754 * If *s is a TAB, and the TAB is not displayed as ^I, and we're not in 1755 * INSERT mode, then col must be adjusted so that it represents the last 1756 * screen position of the TAB. This only fixes an error when the TAB wraps 1757 * from one screen line to the next (when 'columns' is not a multiple of 1758 * 'ts') -- webb. 1759 */ 1760 if (*s == TAB && (State & NORMAL) && (!wp->w_p_list || lcs_tab1)) 1761 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL) - 1; 1762 1763 /* 1764 * Add column offset for 'number', 'foldcolumn', etc. 1765 */ 1766 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp); 1767 if (width > 0) 1768 { 1769 lines += 1; 1770 if (col >= width) 1771 lines += (col - width) / (width + win_col_off2(wp)); 1772 if (lines <= wp->w_height) 1773 return lines; 1774 } 1775 return (int)(wp->w_height); /* maximum length */ 1776 } 1777 1778 int 1779 plines_m_win(wp, first, last) 1780 win_T *wp; 1781 linenr_T first, last; 1782 { 1783 int count = 0; 1784 1785 while (first <= last) 1786 { 1787 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 1788 int x; 1789 1790 /* Check if there are any really folded lines, but also included lines 1791 * that are maybe folded. */ 1792 x = foldedCount(wp, first, NULL); 1793 if (x > 0) 1794 { 1795 ++count; /* count 1 for "+-- folded" line */ 1796 first += x; 1797 } 1798 else 1799 #endif 1800 { 1801 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF 1802 if (first == wp->w_topline) 1803 count += plines_win_nofill(wp, first, TRUE) + wp->w_topfill; 1804 else 1805 #endif 1806 count += plines_win(wp, first, TRUE); 1807 ++first; 1808 } 1809 } 1810 return (count); 1811 } 1812 1813 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) || defined(PROTO) 1814 /* 1815 * Insert string "p" at the cursor position. Stops at a NUL byte. 1816 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters. 1817 */ 1818 void 1819 ins_bytes(p) 1820 char_u *p; 1821 { 1822 ins_bytes_len(p, (int)STRLEN(p)); 1823 } 1824 #endif 1825 1826 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) \ 1827 || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO) 1828 /* 1829 * Insert string "p" with length "len" at the cursor position. 1830 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters. 1831 */ 1832 void 1833 ins_bytes_len(p, len) 1834 char_u *p; 1835 int len; 1836 { 1837 int i; 1838 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1839 int n; 1840 1841 for (i = 0; i < len; i += n) 1842 { 1843 n = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i); 1844 ins_char_bytes(p + i, n); 1845 } 1846 # else 1847 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) 1848 ins_char(p[i]); 1849 # endif 1850 } 1851 #endif 1852 1853 /* 1854 * Insert or replace a single character at the cursor position. 1855 * When in REPLACE or VREPLACE mode, replace any existing character. 1856 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 1857 * For multi-byte characters we get the whole character, the caller must 1858 * convert bytes to a character. 1859 */ 1860 void 1861 ins_char(c) 1862 int c; 1863 { 1864 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO) 1865 char_u buf[MB_MAXBYTES]; 1866 int n; 1867 1868 n = (*mb_char2bytes)(c, buf); 1869 1870 /* When "c" is 0x100, 0x200, etc. we don't want to insert a NUL byte. 1871 * Happens for CTRL-Vu9900. */ 1872 if (buf[0] == 0) 1873 buf[0] = '\n'; 1874 1875 ins_char_bytes(buf, n); 1876 } 1877 1878 void 1879 ins_char_bytes(buf, charlen) 1880 char_u *buf; 1881 int charlen; 1882 { 1883 int c = buf[0]; 1884 int l, j; 1885 #endif 1886 int newlen; /* nr of bytes inserted */ 1887 int oldlen; /* nr of bytes deleted (0 when not replacing) */ 1888 char_u *p; 1889 char_u *newp; 1890 char_u *oldp; 1891 int linelen; /* length of old line including NUL */ 1892 colnr_T col; 1893 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 1894 int i; 1895 1896 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 1897 /* Break tabs if needed. */ 1898 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0) 1899 coladvance_force(getviscol()); 1900 #endif 1901 1902 col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 1903 oldp = ml_get(lnum); 1904 linelen = (int)STRLEN(oldp) + 1; 1905 1906 /* The lengths default to the values for when not replacing. */ 1907 oldlen = 0; 1908 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1909 newlen = charlen; 1910 #else 1911 newlen = 1; 1912 #endif 1913 1914 if (State & REPLACE_FLAG) 1915 { 1916 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 1917 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 1918 { 1919 colnr_T new_vcol = 0; /* init for GCC */ 1920 colnr_T vcol; 1921 int old_list; 1922 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE 1923 char_u buf[2]; 1924 #endif 1925 1926 /* 1927 * Disable 'list' temporarily, unless 'cpo' contains the 'L' flag. 1928 * Returns the old value of list, so when finished, 1929 * curwin->w_p_list should be set back to this. 1930 */ 1931 old_list = curwin->w_p_list; 1932 if (old_list && vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISTWM) == NULL) 1933 curwin->w_p_list = FALSE; 1934 1935 /* 1936 * In virtual replace mode each character may replace one or more 1937 * characters (zero if it's a TAB). Count the number of bytes to 1938 * be deleted to make room for the new character, counting screen 1939 * cells. May result in adding spaces to fill a gap. 1940 */ 1941 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, NULL, &vcol, NULL); 1942 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE 1943 buf[0] = c; 1944 buf[1] = NUL; 1945 #endif 1946 new_vcol = vcol + chartabsize(buf, vcol); 1947 while (oldp[col + oldlen] != NUL && vcol < new_vcol) 1948 { 1949 vcol += chartabsize(oldp + col + oldlen, vcol); 1950 /* Don't need to remove a TAB that takes us to the right 1951 * position. */ 1952 if (vcol > new_vcol && oldp[col + oldlen] == TAB) 1953 break; 1954 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1955 oldlen += (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col + oldlen); 1956 #else 1957 ++oldlen; 1958 #endif 1959 /* Deleted a bit too much, insert spaces. */ 1960 if (vcol > new_vcol) 1961 newlen += vcol - new_vcol; 1962 } 1963 curwin->w_p_list = old_list; 1964 } 1965 else 1966 #endif 1967 if (oldp[col] != NUL) 1968 { 1969 /* normal replace */ 1970 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1971 oldlen = (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col); 1972 #else 1973 oldlen = 1; 1974 #endif 1975 } 1976 1977 1978 /* Push the replaced bytes onto the replace stack, so that they can be 1979 * put back when BS is used. The bytes of a multi-byte character are 1980 * done the other way around, so that the first byte is popped off 1981 * first (it tells the byte length of the character). */ 1982 replace_push(NUL); 1983 for (i = 0; i < oldlen; ++i) 1984 { 1985 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1986 l = (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col + i) - 1; 1987 for (j = l; j >= 0; --j) 1988 replace_push(oldp[col + i + j]); 1989 i += l; 1990 #else 1991 replace_push(oldp[col + i]); 1992 #endif 1993 } 1994 } 1995 1996 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(linelen + newlen - oldlen)); 1997 if (newp == NULL) 1998 return; 1999 2000 /* Copy bytes before the cursor. */ 2001 if (col > 0) 2002 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col); 2003 2004 /* Copy bytes after the changed character(s). */ 2005 p = newp + col; 2006 mch_memmove(p + newlen, oldp + col + oldlen, 2007 (size_t)(linelen - col - oldlen)); 2008 2009 /* Insert or overwrite the new character. */ 2010 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2011 mch_memmove(p, buf, charlen); 2012 i = charlen; 2013 #else 2014 *p = c; 2015 i = 1; 2016 #endif 2017 2018 /* Fill with spaces when necessary. */ 2019 while (i < newlen) 2020 p[i++] = ' '; 2021 2022 /* Replace the line in the buffer. */ 2023 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE); 2024 2025 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */ 2026 changed_bytes(lnum, col); 2027 2028 /* 2029 * If we're in Insert or Replace mode and 'showmatch' is set, then briefly 2030 * show the match for right parens and braces. 2031 */ 2032 if (p_sm && (State & INSERT) 2033 && msg_silent == 0 2034 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2035 && charlen == 1 2036 #endif 2037 ) 2038 showmatch(c); 2039 2040 #ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT 2041 if (!p_ri || (State & REPLACE_FLAG)) 2042 #endif 2043 { 2044 /* Normal insert: move cursor right */ 2045 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2046 curwin->w_cursor.col += charlen; 2047 #else 2048 ++curwin->w_cursor.col; 2049 #endif 2050 } 2051 /* 2052 * TODO: should try to update w_row here, to avoid recomputing it later. 2053 */ 2054 } 2055 2056 /* 2057 * Insert a string at the cursor position. 2058 * Note: Does NOT handle Replace mode. 2059 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 2060 */ 2061 void 2062 ins_str(s) 2063 char_u *s; 2064 { 2065 char_u *oldp, *newp; 2066 int newlen = (int)STRLEN(s); 2067 int oldlen; 2068 colnr_T col; 2069 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 2070 2071 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 2072 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0) 2073 coladvance_force(getviscol()); 2074 #endif 2075 2076 col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 2077 oldp = ml_get(lnum); 2078 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp); 2079 2080 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(oldlen + newlen + 1)); 2081 if (newp == NULL) 2082 return; 2083 if (col > 0) 2084 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col); 2085 mch_memmove(newp + col, s, (size_t)newlen); 2086 mch_memmove(newp + col + newlen, oldp + col, (size_t)(oldlen - col + 1)); 2087 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE); 2088 changed_bytes(lnum, col); 2089 curwin->w_cursor.col += newlen; 2090 } 2091 2092 /* 2093 * Delete one character under the cursor. 2094 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line. 2095 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 2096 * 2097 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise 2098 */ 2099 int 2100 del_char(fixpos) 2101 int fixpos; 2102 { 2103 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2104 if (has_mbyte) 2105 { 2106 /* Make sure the cursor is at the start of a character. */ 2107 mb_adjust_cursor(); 2108 if (*ml_get_cursor() == NUL) 2109 return FAIL; 2110 return del_chars(1L, fixpos); 2111 } 2112 #endif 2113 return del_bytes(1L, fixpos, TRUE); 2114 } 2115 2116 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO) 2117 /* 2118 * Like del_bytes(), but delete characters instead of bytes. 2119 */ 2120 int 2121 del_chars(count, fixpos) 2122 long count; 2123 int fixpos; 2124 { 2125 long bytes = 0; 2126 long i; 2127 char_u *p; 2128 int l; 2129 2130 p = ml_get_cursor(); 2131 for (i = 0; i < count && *p != NUL; ++i) 2132 { 2133 l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p); 2134 bytes += l; 2135 p += l; 2136 } 2137 return del_bytes(bytes, fixpos, TRUE); 2138 } 2139 #endif 2140 2141 /* 2142 * Delete "count" bytes under the cursor. 2143 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line. 2144 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 2145 * 2146 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise 2147 */ 2148 /*ARGSUSED*/ 2149 int 2150 del_bytes(count, fixpos, use_delcombine) 2151 long count; 2152 int fixpos; 2153 int use_delcombine; /* 'delcombine' option applies */ 2154 { 2155 char_u *oldp, *newp; 2156 colnr_T oldlen; 2157 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 2158 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 2159 int was_alloced; 2160 long movelen; 2161 2162 oldp = ml_get(lnum); 2163 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp); 2164 2165 /* 2166 * Can't do anything when the cursor is on the NUL after the line. 2167 */ 2168 if (col >= oldlen) 2169 return FAIL; 2170 2171 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2172 /* If 'delcombine' is set and deleting (less than) one character, only 2173 * delete the last combining character. */ 2174 if (p_deco && use_delcombine && enc_utf8 2175 && utfc_ptr2len(oldp + col) >= count) 2176 { 2177 int c1, c2; 2178 int n; 2179 2180 (void)utfc_ptr2char(oldp + col, &c1, &c2); 2181 if (c1 != NUL) 2182 { 2183 /* Find the last composing char, there can be several. */ 2184 n = col; 2185 do 2186 { 2187 col = n; 2188 count = utf_ptr2len(oldp + n); 2189 n += count; 2190 } while (UTF_COMPOSINGLIKE(oldp + col, oldp + n)); 2191 fixpos = 0; 2192 } 2193 } 2194 #endif 2195 2196 /* 2197 * When count is too big, reduce it. 2198 */ 2199 movelen = (long)oldlen - (long)col - count + 1; /* includes trailing NUL */ 2200 if (movelen <= 1) 2201 { 2202 /* 2203 * If we just took off the last character of a non-blank line, and 2204 * fixpos is TRUE, we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL. 2205 */ 2206 if (col > 0 && fixpos) 2207 { 2208 --curwin->w_cursor.col; 2209 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 2210 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0; 2211 #endif 2212 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2213 if (has_mbyte) 2214 curwin->w_cursor.col -= 2215 (*mb_head_off)(oldp, oldp + curwin->w_cursor.col); 2216 #endif 2217 } 2218 count = oldlen - col; 2219 movelen = 1; 2220 } 2221 2222 /* 2223 * If the old line has been allocated the deletion can be done in the 2224 * existing line. Otherwise a new line has to be allocated 2225 */ 2226 was_alloced = ml_line_alloced(); /* check if oldp was allocated */ 2227 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG 2228 if (was_alloced && usingNetbeans) 2229 netbeans_removed(curbuf, lnum, col, count); 2230 /* else is handled by ml_replace() */ 2231 #endif 2232 if (was_alloced) 2233 newp = oldp; /* use same allocated memory */ 2234 else 2235 { /* need to allocate a new line */ 2236 newp = alloc((unsigned)(oldlen + 1 - count)); 2237 if (newp == NULL) 2238 return FAIL; 2239 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col); 2240 } 2241 mch_memmove(newp + col, oldp + col + count, (size_t)movelen); 2242 if (!was_alloced) 2243 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE); 2244 2245 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */ 2246 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col); 2247 2248 return OK; 2249 } 2250 2251 /* 2252 * Delete from cursor to end of line. 2253 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 2254 * 2255 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise 2256 */ 2257 int 2258 truncate_line(fixpos) 2259 int fixpos; /* if TRUE fix the cursor position when done */ 2260 { 2261 char_u *newp; 2262 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 2263 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 2264 2265 if (col == 0) 2266 newp = vim_strsave((char_u *)""); 2267 else 2268 newp = vim_strnsave(ml_get(lnum), col); 2269 2270 if (newp == NULL) 2271 return FAIL; 2272 2273 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE); 2274 2275 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */ 2276 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col); 2277 2278 /* 2279 * If "fixpos" is TRUE we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL. 2280 */ 2281 if (fixpos && curwin->w_cursor.col > 0) 2282 --curwin->w_cursor.col; 2283 2284 return OK; 2285 } 2286 2287 /* 2288 * Delete "nlines" lines at the cursor. 2289 * Saves the lines for undo first if "undo" is TRUE. 2290 */ 2291 void 2292 del_lines(nlines, undo) 2293 long nlines; /* number of lines to delete */ 2294 int undo; /* if TRUE, prepare for undo */ 2295 { 2296 long n; 2297 2298 if (nlines <= 0) 2299 return; 2300 2301 /* save the deleted lines for undo */ 2302 if (undo && u_savedel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, nlines) == FAIL) 2303 return; 2304 2305 for (n = 0; n < nlines; ) 2306 { 2307 if (curbuf->b_ml.ml_flags & ML_EMPTY) /* nothing to delete */ 2308 break; 2309 2310 ml_delete(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE); 2311 ++n; 2312 2313 /* If we delete the last line in the file, stop */ 2314 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count) 2315 break; 2316 } 2317 /* adjust marks, mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */ 2318 deleted_lines_mark(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, n); 2319 2320 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 2321 check_cursor_lnum(); 2322 } 2323 2324 int 2325 gchar_pos(pos) 2326 pos_T *pos; 2327 { 2328 char_u *ptr = ml_get_pos(pos); 2329 2330 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2331 if (has_mbyte) 2332 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ptr); 2333 #endif 2334 return (int)*ptr; 2335 } 2336 2337 int 2338 gchar_cursor() 2339 { 2340 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2341 if (has_mbyte) 2342 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ml_get_cursor()); 2343 #endif 2344 return (int)*ml_get_cursor(); 2345 } 2346 2347 /* 2348 * Write a character at the current cursor position. 2349 * It is directly written into the block. 2350 */ 2351 void 2352 pchar_cursor(c) 2353 int c; 2354 { 2355 *(ml_get_buf(curbuf, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE) 2356 + curwin->w_cursor.col) = c; 2357 } 2358 2359 #if 0 /* not used */ 2360 /* 2361 * Put *pos at end of current buffer 2362 */ 2363 void 2364 goto_endofbuf(pos) 2365 pos_T *pos; 2366 { 2367 char_u *p; 2368 2369 pos->lnum = curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count; 2370 pos->col = 0; 2371 p = ml_get(pos->lnum); 2372 while (*p++) 2373 ++pos->col; 2374 } 2375 #endif 2376 2377 /* 2378 * When extra == 0: Return TRUE if the cursor is before or on the first 2379 * non-blank in the line. 2380 * When extra == 1: Return TRUE if the cursor is before the first non-blank in 2381 * the line. 2382 */ 2383 int 2384 inindent(extra) 2385 int extra; 2386 { 2387 char_u *ptr; 2388 colnr_T col; 2389 2390 for (col = 0, ptr = ml_get_curline(); vim_iswhite(*ptr); ++col) 2391 ++ptr; 2392 if (col >= curwin->w_cursor.col + extra) 2393 return TRUE; 2394 else 2395 return FALSE; 2396 } 2397 2398 /* 2399 * Skip to next part of an option argument: Skip space and comma. 2400 */ 2401 char_u * 2402 skip_to_option_part(p) 2403 char_u *p; 2404 { 2405 if (*p == ',') 2406 ++p; 2407 while (*p == ' ') 2408 ++p; 2409 return p; 2410 } 2411 2412 /* 2413 * changed() is called when something in the current buffer is changed. 2414 * 2415 * Most often called through changed_bytes() and changed_lines(), which also 2416 * mark the area of the display to be redrawn. 2417 */ 2418 void 2419 changed() 2420 { 2421 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) 2422 /* The text of the preediting area is inserted, but this doesn't 2423 * mean a change of the buffer yet. That is delayed until the 2424 * text is committed. (this means preedit becomes empty) */ 2425 if (im_is_preediting() && !xim_changed_while_preediting) 2426 return; 2427 xim_changed_while_preediting = FALSE; 2428 #endif 2429 2430 if (!curbuf->b_changed) 2431 { 2432 int save_msg_scroll = msg_scroll; 2433 2434 change_warning(0); 2435 /* Create a swap file if that is wanted. 2436 * Don't do this for "nofile" and "nowrite" buffer types. */ 2437 if (curbuf->b_may_swap 2438 #ifdef FEAT_QUICKFIX 2439 && !bt_dontwrite(curbuf) 2440 #endif 2441 ) 2442 { 2443 ml_open_file(curbuf); 2444 2445 /* The ml_open_file() can cause an ATTENTION message. 2446 * Wait two seconds, to make sure the user reads this unexpected 2447 * message. Since we could be anywhere, call wait_return() now, 2448 * and don't let the emsg() set msg_scroll. */ 2449 if (need_wait_return && emsg_silent == 0) 2450 { 2451 out_flush(); 2452 ui_delay(2000L, TRUE); 2453 wait_return(TRUE); 2454 msg_scroll = save_msg_scroll; 2455 } 2456 } 2457 curbuf->b_changed = TRUE; 2458 ml_setflags(curbuf); 2459 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS 2460 check_status(curbuf); 2461 #endif 2462 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE 2463 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */ 2464 #endif 2465 } 2466 ++curbuf->b_changedtick; 2467 } 2468 2469 static void changedOneline __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum)); 2470 static void changed_lines_buf __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum, linenr_T lnume, long xtra)); 2471 static void changed_common __ARGS((linenr_T lnum, colnr_T col, linenr_T lnume, long xtra)); 2472 2473 /* 2474 * Changed bytes within a single line for the current buffer. 2475 * - marks the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed 2476 * - marks the buffer changed by calling changed() 2477 * - invalidates cached values 2478 */ 2479 void 2480 changed_bytes(lnum, col) 2481 linenr_T lnum; 2482 colnr_T col; 2483 { 2484 changedOneline(curbuf, lnum); 2485 changed_common(lnum, col, lnum + 1, 0L); 2486 2487 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF 2488 /* Diff highlighting in other diff windows may need to be updated too. */ 2489 if (curwin->w_p_diff) 2490 { 2491 win_T *wp; 2492 linenr_T wlnum; 2493 2494 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next) 2495 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin) 2496 { 2497 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID); 2498 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp); 2499 if (wlnum > 0) 2500 changedOneline(wp->w_buffer, wlnum); 2501 } 2502 } 2503 #endif 2504 } 2505 2506 static void 2507 changedOneline(buf, lnum) 2508 buf_T *buf; 2509 linenr_T lnum; 2510 { 2511 if (buf->b_mod_set) 2512 { 2513 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */ 2514 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top) 2515 buf->b_mod_top = lnum; 2516 else if (lnum >= buf->b_mod_bot) 2517 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1; 2518 } 2519 else 2520 { 2521 /* set the area that must be redisplayed to one line */ 2522 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE; 2523 buf->b_mod_top = lnum; 2524 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1; 2525 buf->b_mod_xlines = 0; 2526 } 2527 } 2528 2529 /* 2530 * Appended "count" lines below line "lnum" in the current buffer. 2531 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust(). 2532 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag. 2533 */ 2534 void 2535 appended_lines(lnum, count) 2536 linenr_T lnum; 2537 long count; 2538 { 2539 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count); 2540 } 2541 2542 /* 2543 * Like appended_lines(), but adjust marks first. 2544 */ 2545 void 2546 appended_lines_mark(lnum, count) 2547 linenr_T lnum; 2548 long count; 2549 { 2550 mark_adjust(lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, count, 0L); 2551 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count); 2552 } 2553 2554 /* 2555 * Deleted "count" lines at line "lnum" in the current buffer. 2556 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust(). 2557 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag. 2558 */ 2559 void 2560 deleted_lines(lnum, count) 2561 linenr_T lnum; 2562 long count; 2563 { 2564 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count); 2565 } 2566 2567 /* 2568 * Like deleted_lines(), but adjust marks first. 2569 */ 2570 void 2571 deleted_lines_mark(lnum, count) 2572 linenr_T lnum; 2573 long count; 2574 { 2575 mark_adjust(lnum, (linenr_T)(lnum + count - 1), (long)MAXLNUM, -count); 2576 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count); 2577 } 2578 2579 /* 2580 * Changed lines for the current buffer. 2581 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust(). 2582 * - mark the buffer changed by calling changed() 2583 * - mark the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed 2584 * - invalidate cached values 2585 * "lnum" is the first line that needs displaying, "lnume" the first line 2586 * below the changed lines (BEFORE the change). 2587 * When only inserting lines, "lnum" and "lnume" are equal. 2588 * Takes care of calling changed() and updating b_mod_*. 2589 */ 2590 void 2591 changed_lines(lnum, col, lnume, xtra) 2592 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */ 2593 colnr_T col; /* column in first line with change */ 2594 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */ 2595 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */ 2596 { 2597 changed_lines_buf(curbuf, lnum, lnume, xtra); 2598 2599 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF 2600 if (xtra == 0 && curwin->w_p_diff) 2601 { 2602 /* When the number of lines doesn't change then mark_adjust() isn't 2603 * called and other diff buffers still need to be marked for 2604 * displaying. */ 2605 win_T *wp; 2606 linenr_T wlnum; 2607 2608 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next) 2609 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin) 2610 { 2611 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID); 2612 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp); 2613 if (wlnum > 0) 2614 changed_lines_buf(wp->w_buffer, wlnum, 2615 lnume - lnum + wlnum, 0L); 2616 } 2617 } 2618 #endif 2619 2620 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra); 2621 } 2622 2623 static void 2624 changed_lines_buf(buf, lnum, lnume, xtra) 2625 buf_T *buf; 2626 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */ 2627 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */ 2628 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */ 2629 { 2630 if (buf->b_mod_set) 2631 { 2632 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */ 2633 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top) 2634 buf->b_mod_top = lnum; 2635 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_bot) 2636 { 2637 /* adjust old bot position for xtra lines */ 2638 buf->b_mod_bot += xtra; 2639 if (buf->b_mod_bot < lnum) 2640 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum; 2641 } 2642 if (lnume + xtra > buf->b_mod_bot) 2643 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra; 2644 buf->b_mod_xlines += xtra; 2645 } 2646 else 2647 { 2648 /* set the area that must be redisplayed */ 2649 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE; 2650 buf->b_mod_top = lnum; 2651 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra; 2652 buf->b_mod_xlines = xtra; 2653 } 2654 } 2655 2656 static void 2657 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra) 2658 linenr_T lnum; 2659 colnr_T col; 2660 linenr_T lnume; 2661 long xtra; 2662 { 2663 win_T *wp; 2664 int i; 2665 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST 2666 int cols; 2667 pos_T *p; 2668 int add; 2669 #endif 2670 2671 /* mark the buffer as modified */ 2672 changed(); 2673 2674 /* set the '. mark */ 2675 if (!cmdmod.keepjumps) 2676 { 2677 curbuf->b_last_change.lnum = lnum; 2678 curbuf->b_last_change.col = col; 2679 2680 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST 2681 /* Create a new entry if a new undo-able change was started or we 2682 * don't have an entry yet. */ 2683 if (curbuf->b_new_change || curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0) 2684 { 2685 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0) 2686 add = TRUE; 2687 else 2688 { 2689 /* Don't create a new entry when the line number is the same 2690 * as the last one and the column is not too far away. Avoids 2691 * creating many entries for typing "xxxxx". */ 2692 p = &curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1]; 2693 if (p->lnum != lnum) 2694 add = TRUE; 2695 else 2696 { 2697 cols = comp_textwidth(FALSE); 2698 if (cols == 0) 2699 cols = 79; 2700 add = (p->col + cols < col || col + cols < p->col); 2701 } 2702 } 2703 if (add) 2704 { 2705 /* This is the first of a new sequence of undo-able changes 2706 * and it's at some distance of the last change. Use a new 2707 * position in the changelist. */ 2708 curbuf->b_new_change = FALSE; 2709 2710 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == JUMPLISTSIZE) 2711 { 2712 /* changelist is full: remove oldest entry */ 2713 curbuf->b_changelistlen = JUMPLISTSIZE - 1; 2714 mch_memmove(curbuf->b_changelist, curbuf->b_changelist + 1, 2715 sizeof(pos_T) * (JUMPLISTSIZE - 1)); 2716 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp) 2717 { 2718 /* Correct position in changelist for other windows on 2719 * this buffer. */ 2720 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf && wp->w_changelistidx > 0) 2721 --wp->w_changelistidx; 2722 } 2723 } 2724 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp) 2725 { 2726 /* For other windows, if the position in the changelist is 2727 * at the end it stays at the end. */ 2728 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf 2729 && wp->w_changelistidx == curbuf->b_changelistlen) 2730 ++wp->w_changelistidx; 2731 } 2732 ++curbuf->b_changelistlen; 2733 } 2734 } 2735 curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1] = 2736 curbuf->b_last_change; 2737 /* The current window is always after the last change, so that "g," 2738 * takes you back to it. */ 2739 curwin->w_changelistidx = curbuf->b_changelistlen; 2740 #endif 2741 } 2742 2743 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp) 2744 { 2745 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf) 2746 { 2747 /* Mark this window to be redrawn later. */ 2748 if (wp->w_redr_type < VALID) 2749 wp->w_redr_type = VALID; 2750 2751 /* Check if a change in the buffer has invalidated the cached 2752 * values for the cursor. */ 2753 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 2754 /* 2755 * Update the folds for this window. Can't postpone this, because 2756 * a following operator might work on the whole fold: ">>dd". 2757 */ 2758 foldUpdate(wp, lnum, lnume + xtra - 1); 2759 2760 /* The change may cause lines above or below the change to become 2761 * included in a fold. Set lnum/lnume to the first/last line that 2762 * might be displayed differently. 2763 * Set w_cline_folded here as an efficient way to update it when 2764 * inserting lines just above a closed fold. */ 2765 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnum, &lnum, NULL, FALSE, NULL); 2766 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum) 2767 wp->w_cline_folded = i; 2768 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnume, NULL, &lnume, FALSE, NULL); 2769 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnume) 2770 wp->w_cline_folded = i; 2771 2772 /* If the changed line is in a range of previously folded lines, 2773 * compare with the first line in that range. */ 2774 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum <= lnum) 2775 { 2776 i = find_wl_entry(wp, lnum); 2777 if (i >= 0 && wp->w_cursor.lnum > wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum) 2778 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp); 2779 } 2780 #endif 2781 2782 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum > lnum) 2783 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp); 2784 else if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum && wp->w_cursor.col >= col) 2785 changed_cline_bef_curs_win(wp); 2786 if (wp->w_botline >= lnum) 2787 { 2788 /* Assume that botline doesn't change (inserted lines make 2789 * other lines scroll down below botline). */ 2790 approximate_botline_win(wp); 2791 } 2792 2793 /* Check if any w_lines[] entries have become invalid. 2794 * For entries below the change: Correct the lnums for 2795 * inserted/deleted lines. Makes it possible to stop displaying 2796 * after the change. */ 2797 for (i = 0; i < wp->w_lines_valid; ++i) 2798 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid) 2799 { 2800 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum >= lnum) 2801 { 2802 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum < lnume) 2803 { 2804 /* line included in change */ 2805 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE; 2806 } 2807 else if (xtra != 0) 2808 { 2809 /* line below change */ 2810 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum += xtra; 2811 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 2812 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum += xtra; 2813 #endif 2814 } 2815 } 2816 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 2817 else if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum >= lnum) 2818 { 2819 /* change somewhere inside this range of folded lines, 2820 * may need to be redrawn */ 2821 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE; 2822 } 2823 #endif 2824 } 2825 } 2826 } 2827 2828 /* Call update_screen() later, which checks out what needs to be redrawn, 2829 * since it notices b_mod_set and then uses b_mod_*. */ 2830 if (must_redraw < VALID) 2831 must_redraw = VALID; 2832 } 2833 2834 /* 2835 * unchanged() is called when the changed flag must be reset for buffer 'buf' 2836 */ 2837 void 2838 unchanged(buf, ff) 2839 buf_T *buf; 2840 int ff; /* also reset 'fileformat' */ 2841 { 2842 if (buf->b_changed || (ff && file_ff_differs(buf))) 2843 { 2844 buf->b_changed = 0; 2845 ml_setflags(buf); 2846 if (ff) 2847 save_file_ff(buf); 2848 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS 2849 check_status(buf); 2850 #endif 2851 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE 2852 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */ 2853 #endif 2854 } 2855 ++buf->b_changedtick; 2856 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG 2857 netbeans_unmodified(buf); 2858 #endif 2859 } 2860 2861 #if defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO) 2862 /* 2863 * check_status: called when the status bars for the buffer 'buf' 2864 * need to be updated 2865 */ 2866 void 2867 check_status(buf) 2868 buf_T *buf; 2869 { 2870 win_T *wp; 2871 2872 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next) 2873 if (wp->w_buffer == buf && wp->w_status_height) 2874 { 2875 wp->w_redr_status = TRUE; 2876 if (must_redraw < VALID) 2877 must_redraw = VALID; 2878 } 2879 } 2880 #endif 2881 2882 /* 2883 * If the file is readonly, give a warning message with the first change. 2884 * Don't do this for autocommands. 2885 * Don't use emsg(), because it flushes the macro buffer. 2886 * If we have undone all changes b_changed will be FALSE, but "b_did_warn" 2887 * will be TRUE. 2888 */ 2889 void 2890 change_warning(col) 2891 int col; /* column for message; non-zero when in insert 2892 mode and 'showmode' is on */ 2893 { 2894 if (curbuf->b_did_warn == FALSE 2895 && curbufIsChanged() == 0 2896 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD 2897 && !autocmd_busy 2898 #endif 2899 && curbuf->b_p_ro) 2900 { 2901 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD 2902 apply_autocmds(EVENT_FILECHANGEDRO, NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf); 2903 if (!curbuf->b_p_ro) 2904 return; 2905 #endif 2906 /* 2907 * Do what msg() does, but with a column offset if the warning should 2908 * be after the mode message. 2909 */ 2910 msg_start(); 2911 if (msg_row == Rows - 1) 2912 msg_col = col; 2913 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W)); 2914 MSG_PUTS_ATTR(_("W10: Warning: Changing a readonly file"), 2915 hl_attr(HLF_W) | MSG_HIST); 2916 msg_clr_eos(); 2917 (void)msg_end(); 2918 if (msg_silent == 0 && !silent_mode) 2919 { 2920 out_flush(); 2921 ui_delay(1000L, TRUE); /* give the user time to think about it */ 2922 } 2923 curbuf->b_did_warn = TRUE; 2924 redraw_cmdline = FALSE; /* don't redraw and erase the message */ 2925 if (msg_row < Rows - 1) 2926 showmode(); 2927 } 2928 } 2929 2930 /* 2931 * Ask for a reply from the user, a 'y' or a 'n'. 2932 * No other characters are accepted, the message is repeated until a valid 2933 * reply is entered or CTRL-C is hit. 2934 * If direct is TRUE, don't use vgetc() but ui_inchar(), don't get characters 2935 * from any buffers but directly from the user. 2936 * 2937 * return the 'y' or 'n' 2938 */ 2939 int 2940 ask_yesno(str, direct) 2941 char_u *str; 2942 int direct; 2943 { 2944 int r = ' '; 2945 int save_State = State; 2946 2947 if (exiting) /* put terminal in raw mode for this question */ 2948 settmode(TMODE_RAW); 2949 ++no_wait_return; 2950 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL 2951 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */ 2952 #endif 2953 State = CONFIRM; /* mouse behaves like with :confirm */ 2954 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE 2955 setmouse(); /* disables mouse for xterm */ 2956 #endif 2957 ++no_mapping; 2958 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */ 2959 2960 while (r != 'y' && r != 'n') 2961 { 2962 /* same highlighting as for wait_return */ 2963 smsg_attr(hl_attr(HLF_R), (char_u *)"%s (y/n)?", str); 2964 if (direct) 2965 r = get_keystroke(); 2966 else 2967 r = safe_vgetc(); 2968 if (r == Ctrl_C || r == ESC) 2969 r = 'n'; 2970 msg_putchar(r); /* show what you typed */ 2971 out_flush(); 2972 } 2973 --no_wait_return; 2974 State = save_State; 2975 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE 2976 setmouse(); 2977 #endif 2978 --no_mapping; 2979 --allow_keys; 2980 2981 return r; 2982 } 2983 2984 /* 2985 * Get a key stroke directly from the user. 2986 * Ignores mouse clicks and scrollbar events, except a click for the left 2987 * button (used at the more prompt). 2988 * Doesn't use vgetc(), because it syncs undo and eats mapped characters. 2989 * Disadvantage: typeahead is ignored. 2990 * Translates the interrupt character for unix to ESC. 2991 */ 2992 int 2993 get_keystroke() 2994 { 2995 #define CBUFLEN 151 2996 char_u buf[CBUFLEN]; 2997 int len = 0; 2998 int n; 2999 int save_mapped_ctrl_c = mapped_ctrl_c; 3000 3001 mapped_ctrl_c = FALSE; /* mappings are not used here */ 3002 for (;;) 3003 { 3004 cursor_on(); 3005 out_flush(); 3006 3007 /* First time: blocking wait. Second time: wait up to 100ms for a 3008 * terminal code to complete. Leave some room for check_termcode() to 3009 * insert a key code into (max 5 chars plus NUL). And 3010 * fix_input_buffer() can triple the number of bytes. */ 3011 n = ui_inchar(buf + len, (CBUFLEN - 6 - len) / 3, 3012 len == 0 ? -1L : 100L, 0); 3013 if (n > 0) 3014 { 3015 /* Replace zero and CSI by a special key code. */ 3016 n = fix_input_buffer(buf + len, n, FALSE); 3017 len += n; 3018 } 3019 3020 /* incomplete termcode: get more characters */ 3021 if ((n = check_termcode(1, buf, len)) < 0) 3022 continue; 3023 /* found a termcode: adjust length */ 3024 if (n > 0) 3025 len = n; 3026 if (len == 0) /* nothing typed yet */ 3027 continue; 3028 3029 /* Handle modifier and/or special key code. */ 3030 n = buf[0]; 3031 if (n == K_SPECIAL) 3032 { 3033 n = TO_SPECIAL(buf[1], buf[2]); 3034 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER 3035 || n == K_IGNORE 3036 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE 3037 || n == K_LEFTMOUSE_NM 3038 || n == K_LEFTDRAG 3039 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE 3040 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE_NM 3041 || n == K_MIDDLEMOUSE 3042 || n == K_MIDDLEDRAG 3043 || n == K_MIDDLERELEASE 3044 || n == K_RIGHTMOUSE 3045 || n == K_RIGHTDRAG 3046 || n == K_RIGHTRELEASE 3047 || n == K_MOUSEDOWN 3048 || n == K_MOUSEUP 3049 || n == K_X1MOUSE 3050 || n == K_X1DRAG 3051 || n == K_X1RELEASE 3052 || n == K_X2MOUSE 3053 || n == K_X2DRAG 3054 || n == K_X2RELEASE 3055 # ifdef FEAT_GUI 3056 || n == K_VER_SCROLLBAR 3057 || n == K_HOR_SCROLLBAR 3058 # endif 3059 #endif 3060 ) 3061 { 3062 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER) 3063 mod_mask = buf[2]; 3064 len -= 3; 3065 if (len > 0) 3066 mch_memmove(buf, buf + 3, (size_t)len); 3067 continue; 3068 } 3069 } 3070 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 3071 if (has_mbyte) 3072 { 3073 if (MB_BYTE2LEN(n) > len) 3074 continue; /* more bytes to get */ 3075 buf[len >= CBUFLEN ? CBUFLEN - 1 : len] = NUL; 3076 n = (*mb_ptr2char)(buf); 3077 } 3078 #endif 3079 #ifdef UNIX 3080 if (n == intr_char) 3081 n = ESC; 3082 #endif 3083 break; 3084 } 3085 3086 mapped_ctrl_c = save_mapped_ctrl_c; 3087 return n; 3088 } 3089 3090 /* 3091 * Get a number from the user. 3092 * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse. 3093 */ 3094 int 3095 get_number(colon, mouse_used) 3096 int colon; /* allow colon to abort */ 3097 int *mouse_used; 3098 { 3099 int n = 0; 3100 int c; 3101 3102 if (mouse_used != NULL) 3103 *mouse_used = FALSE; 3104 3105 /* When not printing messages, the user won't know what to type, return a 3106 * zero (as if CR was hit). */ 3107 if (msg_silent != 0) 3108 return 0; 3109 3110 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL 3111 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */ 3112 #endif 3113 ++no_mapping; 3114 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */ 3115 for (;;) 3116 { 3117 windgoto(msg_row, msg_col); 3118 c = safe_vgetc(); 3119 if (VIM_ISDIGIT(c)) 3120 { 3121 n = n * 10 + c - '0'; 3122 msg_putchar(c); 3123 } 3124 else if (c == K_DEL || c == K_KDEL || c == K_BS || c == Ctrl_H) 3125 { 3126 n /= 10; 3127 MSG_PUTS("\b \b"); 3128 } 3129 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE 3130 else if (mouse_used != NULL && c == K_LEFTMOUSE) 3131 { 3132 *mouse_used = TRUE; 3133 n = mouse_row + 1; 3134 break; 3135 } 3136 #endif 3137 else if (n == 0 && c == ':' && colon) 3138 { 3139 stuffcharReadbuff(':'); 3140 if (!exmode_active) 3141 cmdline_row = msg_row; 3142 skip_redraw = TRUE; /* skip redraw once */ 3143 do_redraw = FALSE; 3144 break; 3145 } 3146 else if (c == CAR || c == NL || c == Ctrl_C || c == ESC) 3147 break; 3148 } 3149 --no_mapping; 3150 --allow_keys; 3151 return n; 3152 } 3153 3154 /* 3155 * Ask the user to enter a number. 3156 * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse and in that case return 3157 * the line number. 3158 */ 3159 int 3160 prompt_for_number(mouse_used) 3161 int *mouse_used; 3162 { 3163 int i; 3164 int save_cmdline_row; 3165 int save_State; 3166 3167 /* When using ":silent" assume that <CR> was entered. */ 3168 if (mouse_used != NULL) 3169 MSG_PUTS(_("Type number or click with mouse (<Enter> cancels): ")); 3170 else 3171 MSG_PUTS(_("Choice number (<Enter> cancels): ")); 3172 3173 /* Set the state such that text can be selected/copied/pasted. */ 3174 save_cmdline_row = cmdline_row; 3175 cmdline_row = Rows - 1; 3176 save_State = State; 3177 if (mouse_used == NULL) 3178 State = CMDLINE; 3179 else 3180 State = NORMAL; 3181 3182 i = get_number(TRUE, mouse_used); 3183 if (KeyTyped) 3184 { 3185 /* don't call wait_return() now */ 3186 /* msg_putchar('\n'); */ 3187 cmdline_row = msg_row - 1; 3188 need_wait_return = FALSE; 3189 msg_didany = FALSE; 3190 } 3191 else 3192 cmdline_row = save_cmdline_row; 3193 State = save_State; 3194 3195 return i; 3196 } 3197 3198 void 3199 msgmore(n) 3200 long n; 3201 { 3202 long pn; 3203 3204 if (global_busy /* no messages now, wait until global is finished */ 3205 || !messaging()) /* 'lazyredraw' set, don't do messages now */ 3206 return; 3207 3208 /* We don't want to overwrite another important message, but do overwrite 3209 * a previous "more lines" or "fewer lines" message, so that "5dd" and 3210 * then "put" reports the last action. */ 3211 if (keep_msg != NULL && !keep_msg_more) 3212 return; 3213 3214 if (n > 0) 3215 pn = n; 3216 else 3217 pn = -n; 3218 3219 if (pn > p_report) 3220 { 3221 if (pn == 1) 3222 { 3223 if (n > 0) 3224 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 more line")); 3225 else 3226 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 line less")); 3227 } 3228 else 3229 { 3230 if (n > 0) 3231 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld more lines"), pn); 3232 else 3233 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld fewer lines"), pn); 3234 } 3235 if (got_int) 3236 STRCAT(msg_buf, _(" (Interrupted)")); 3237 if (msg(msg_buf)) 3238 { 3239 set_keep_msg(msg_buf); 3240 keep_msg_attr = 0; 3241 keep_msg_more = TRUE; 3242 } 3243 } 3244 } 3245 3246 /* 3247 * flush map and typeahead buffers and give a warning for an error 3248 */ 3249 void 3250 beep_flush() 3251 { 3252 if (emsg_silent == 0) 3253 { 3254 flush_buffers(FALSE); 3255 vim_beep(); 3256 } 3257 } 3258 3259 /* 3260 * give a warning for an error 3261 */ 3262 void 3263 vim_beep() 3264 { 3265 if (emsg_silent == 0) 3266 { 3267 if (p_vb 3268 #ifdef FEAT_GUI 3269 /* While the GUI is starting up the termcap is set for the GUI 3270 * but the output still goes to a terminal. */ 3271 && !(gui.in_use && gui.starting) 3272 #endif 3273 ) 3274 { 3275 out_str(T_VB); 3276 } 3277 else 3278 { 3279 #ifdef MSDOS 3280 /* 3281 * The number of beeps outputted is reduced to avoid having to wait 3282 * for all the beeps to finish. This is only a problem on systems 3283 * where the beeps don't overlap. 3284 */ 3285 if (beep_count == 0 || beep_count == 10) 3286 { 3287 out_char(BELL); 3288 beep_count = 1; 3289 } 3290 else 3291 ++beep_count; 3292 #else 3293 out_char(BELL); 3294 #endif 3295 } 3296 3297 /* When 'verbose' is set and we are sourcing a script or executing a 3298 * function give the user a hint where the beep comes from. */ 3299 if (vim_strchr(p_debug, 'e') != NULL) 3300 { 3301 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W)); 3302 msg_attr((char_u *)_("Beep!"), hl_attr(HLF_W)); 3303 } 3304 } 3305 } 3306 3307 /* 3308 * To get the "real" home directory: 3309 * - get value of $HOME 3310 * For Unix: 3311 * - go to that directory 3312 * - do mch_dirname() to get the real name of that directory. 3313 * This also works with mounts and links. 3314 * Don't do this for MS-DOS, it will change the "current dir" for a drive. 3315 */ 3316 static char_u *homedir = NULL; 3317 3318 void 3319 init_homedir() 3320 { 3321 char_u *var; 3322 3323 /* In case we are called a second time (when 'encoding' changes). */ 3324 vim_free(homedir); 3325 homedir = NULL; 3326 3327 #ifdef VMS 3328 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN"); 3329 #else 3330 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME"); 3331 #endif 3332 3333 if (var != NULL && *var == NUL) /* empty is same as not set */ 3334 var = NULL; 3335 3336 #ifdef WIN3264 3337 /* 3338 * Weird but true: $HOME may contain an indirect reference to another 3339 * variable, esp. "%USERPROFILE%". Happens when $USERPROFILE isn't set 3340 * when $HOME is being set. 3341 */ 3342 if (var != NULL && *var == '%') 3343 { 3344 char_u *p; 3345 char_u *exp; 3346 3347 p = vim_strchr(var + 1, '%'); 3348 if (p != NULL) 3349 { 3350 vim_strncpy(NameBuff, var + 1, p - (var + 1)); 3351 exp = mch_getenv(NameBuff); 3352 if (exp != NULL && *exp != NUL 3353 && STRLEN(exp) + STRLEN(p) < MAXPATHL) 3354 { 3355 vim_snprintf((char *)NameBuff, MAXPATHL, "%s%s", exp, p + 1); 3356 var = NameBuff; 3357 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */ 3358 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff); 3359 } 3360 } 3361 } 3362 3363 /* 3364 * Typically, $HOME is not defined on Windows, unless the user has 3365 * specifically defined it for Vim's sake. However, on Windows NT 3366 * platforms, $HOMEDRIVE and $HOMEPATH are automatically defined for 3367 * each user. Try constructing $HOME from these. 3368 */ 3369 if (var == NULL) 3370 { 3371 char_u *homedrive, *homepath; 3372 3373 homedrive = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEDRIVE"); 3374 homepath = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEPATH"); 3375 if (homedrive != NULL && homepath != NULL 3376 && STRLEN(homedrive) + STRLEN(homepath) < MAXPATHL) 3377 { 3378 sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", homedrive, homepath); 3379 if (NameBuff[0] != NUL) 3380 { 3381 var = NameBuff; 3382 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */ 3383 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff); 3384 } 3385 } 3386 } 3387 3388 # if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) 3389 if (enc_utf8 && var != NULL) 3390 { 3391 int len; 3392 char_u *pp; 3393 3394 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are 3395 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */ 3396 acp_to_enc(var, STRLEN(var), &pp, &len); 3397 if (pp != NULL) 3398 { 3399 homedir = pp; 3400 return; 3401 } 3402 } 3403 # endif 3404 #endif 3405 3406 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) 3407 /* 3408 * Default home dir is C:/ 3409 * Best assumption we can make in such a situation. 3410 */ 3411 if (var == NULL) 3412 var = "C:/"; 3413 #endif 3414 if (var != NULL) 3415 { 3416 #ifdef UNIX 3417 /* 3418 * Change to the directory and get the actual path. This resolves 3419 * links. Don't do it when we can't return. 3420 */ 3421 if (mch_dirname(NameBuff, MAXPATHL) == OK 3422 && mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) == 0) 3423 { 3424 if (!mch_chdir((char *)var) && mch_dirname(IObuff, IOSIZE) == OK) 3425 var = IObuff; 3426 if (mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) != 0) 3427 EMSG(_(e_prev_dir)); 3428 } 3429 #endif 3430 homedir = vim_strsave(var); 3431 } 3432 } 3433 3434 #if defined(EXITFREE) || defined(PROTO) 3435 void 3436 free_homedir() 3437 { 3438 vim_free(homedir); 3439 } 3440 #endif 3441 3442 /* 3443 * Expand environment variable with path name. 3444 * "~/" is also expanded, using $HOME. For Unix "~user/" is expanded. 3445 * Skips over "\ ", "\~" and "\$". 3446 * If anything fails no expansion is done and dst equals src. 3447 */ 3448 void 3449 expand_env(src, dst, dstlen) 3450 char_u *src; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */ 3451 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */ 3452 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */ 3453 { 3454 expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, FALSE, NULL); 3455 } 3456 3457 void 3458 expand_env_esc(srcp, dst, dstlen, esc, startstr) 3459 char_u *srcp; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */ 3460 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */ 3461 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */ 3462 int esc; /* escape spaces in expanded variables */ 3463 char_u *startstr; /* start again after this (can be NULL) */ 3464 { 3465 char_u *src; 3466 char_u *tail; 3467 int c; 3468 char_u *var; 3469 int copy_char; 3470 int mustfree; /* var was allocated, need to free it later */ 3471 int at_start = TRUE; /* at start of a name */ 3472 int startstr_len = 0; 3473 3474 if (startstr != NULL) 3475 startstr_len = STRLEN(startstr); 3476 3477 src = skipwhite(srcp); 3478 --dstlen; /* leave one char space for "\," */ 3479 while (*src && dstlen > 0) 3480 { 3481 copy_char = TRUE; 3482 if ((*src == '$' 3483 #ifdef VMS 3484 && at_start 3485 #endif 3486 ) 3487 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) 3488 || *src == '%' 3489 #endif 3490 || (*src == '~' && at_start)) 3491 { 3492 mustfree = FALSE; 3493 3494 /* 3495 * The variable name is copied into dst temporarily, because it may 3496 * be a string in read-only memory and a NUL needs to be appended. 3497 */ 3498 if (*src != '~') /* environment var */ 3499 { 3500 tail = src + 1; 3501 var = dst; 3502 c = dstlen - 1; 3503 3504 #ifdef UNIX 3505 /* Unix has ${var-name} type environment vars */ 3506 if (*tail == '{' && !vim_isIDc('{')) 3507 { 3508 tail++; /* ignore '{' */ 3509 while (c-- > 0 && *tail && *tail != '}') 3510 *var++ = *tail++; 3511 } 3512 else 3513 #endif 3514 { 3515 while (c-- > 0 && *tail != NUL && ((vim_isIDc(*tail)) 3516 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) 3517 || (*src == '%' && *tail != '%') 3518 #endif 3519 )) 3520 { 3521 #ifdef OS2 /* env vars only in uppercase */ 3522 *var++ = TOUPPER_LOC(*tail); 3523 tail++; /* toupper() may be a macro! */ 3524 #else 3525 *var++ = *tail++; 3526 #endif 3527 } 3528 } 3529 3530 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX) 3531 # ifdef UNIX 3532 if (src[1] == '{' && *tail != '}') 3533 # else 3534 if (*src == '%' && *tail != '%') 3535 # endif 3536 var = NULL; 3537 else 3538 { 3539 # ifdef UNIX 3540 if (src[1] == '{') 3541 # else 3542 if (*src == '%') 3543 #endif 3544 ++tail; 3545 #endif 3546 *var = NUL; 3547 var = vim_getenv(dst, &mustfree); 3548 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX) 3549 } 3550 #endif 3551 } 3552 /* home directory */ 3553 else if ( src[1] == NUL 3554 || vim_ispathsep(src[1]) 3555 || vim_strchr((char_u *)" ,\t\n", src[1]) != NULL) 3556 { 3557 var = homedir; 3558 tail = src + 1; 3559 } 3560 else /* user directory */ 3561 { 3562 #if defined(UNIX) || (defined(VMS) && defined(USER_HOME)) 3563 /* 3564 * Copy ~user to dst[], so we can put a NUL after it. 3565 */ 3566 tail = src; 3567 var = dst; 3568 c = dstlen - 1; 3569 while ( c-- > 0 3570 && *tail 3571 && vim_isfilec(*tail) 3572 && !vim_ispathsep(*tail)) 3573 *var++ = *tail++; 3574 *var = NUL; 3575 # ifdef UNIX 3576 /* 3577 * If the system supports getpwnam(), use it. 3578 * Otherwise, or if getpwnam() fails, the shell is used to 3579 * expand ~user. This is slower and may fail if the shell 3580 * does not support ~user (old versions of /bin/sh). 3581 */ 3582 # if defined(HAVE_GETPWNAM) && defined(HAVE_PWD_H) 3583 { 3584 struct passwd *pw; 3585 3586 pw = getpwnam((char *)dst + 1); 3587 if (pw != NULL) 3588 var = (char_u *)pw->pw_dir; 3589 else 3590 var = NULL; 3591 } 3592 if (var == NULL) 3593 # endif 3594 { 3595 expand_T xpc; 3596 3597 ExpandInit(&xpc); 3598 xpc.xp_context = EXPAND_FILES; 3599 var = ExpandOne(&xpc, dst, NULL, 3600 WILD_ADD_SLASH|WILD_SILENT, WILD_EXPAND_FREE); 3601 ExpandCleanup(&xpc); 3602 mustfree = TRUE; 3603 } 3604 3605 # else /* !UNIX, thus VMS */ 3606 /* 3607 * USER_HOME is a comma-separated list of 3608 * directories to search for the user account in. 3609 */ 3610 { 3611 char_u test[MAXPATHL], paths[MAXPATHL]; 3612 char_u *path, *next_path, *ptr; 3613 struct stat st; 3614 3615 STRCPY(paths, USER_HOME); 3616 next_path = paths; 3617 while (*next_path) 3618 { 3619 for (path = next_path; *next_path && *next_path != ','; 3620 next_path++); 3621 if (*next_path) 3622 *next_path++ = NUL; 3623 STRCPY(test, path); 3624 STRCAT(test, "/"); 3625 STRCAT(test, dst + 1); 3626 if (mch_stat(test, &st) == 0) 3627 { 3628 var = alloc(STRLEN(test) + 1); 3629 STRCPY(var, test); 3630 mustfree = TRUE; 3631 break; 3632 } 3633 } 3634 } 3635 # endif /* UNIX */ 3636 #else 3637 /* cannot expand user's home directory, so don't try */ 3638 var = NULL; 3639 tail = (char_u *)""; /* for gcc */ 3640 #endif /* UNIX || VMS */ 3641 } 3642 3643 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME 3644 /* If 'shellslash' is set change backslashes to forward slashes. 3645 * Can't use slash_adjust(), p_ssl may be set temporarily. */ 3646 if (p_ssl && var != NULL && vim_strchr(var, '\\') != NULL) 3647 { 3648 char_u *p = vim_strsave(var); 3649 3650 if (p != NULL) 3651 { 3652 if (mustfree) 3653 vim_free(var); 3654 var = p; 3655 mustfree = TRUE; 3656 forward_slash(var); 3657 } 3658 } 3659 #endif 3660 3661 /* If "var" contains white space, escape it with a backslash. 3662 * Required for ":e ~/tt" when $HOME includes a space. */ 3663 if (esc && var != NULL && vim_strpbrk(var, (char_u *)" \t") != NULL) 3664 { 3665 char_u *p = vim_strsave_escaped(var, (char_u *)" \t"); 3666 3667 if (p != NULL) 3668 { 3669 if (mustfree) 3670 vim_free(var); 3671 var = p; 3672 mustfree = TRUE; 3673 } 3674 } 3675 3676 if (var != NULL && *var != NUL 3677 && (STRLEN(var) + STRLEN(tail) + 1 < (unsigned)dstlen)) 3678 { 3679 STRCPY(dst, var); 3680 dstlen -= (int)STRLEN(var); 3681 c = STRLEN(var); 3682 /* if var[] ends in a path separator and tail[] starts 3683 * with it, skip a character */ 3684 if (*var != NUL && after_pathsep(dst, dst + c) 3685 #if defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME) || defined(AMIGA) 3686 && dst[-1] != ':' 3687 #endif 3688 && vim_ispathsep(*tail)) 3689 ++tail; 3690 dst += c; 3691 src = tail; 3692 copy_char = FALSE; 3693 } 3694 if (mustfree) 3695 vim_free(var); 3696 } 3697 3698 if (copy_char) /* copy at least one char */ 3699 { 3700 /* 3701 * Recogize the start of a new name, for '~'. 3702 */ 3703 at_start = FALSE; 3704 if (src[0] == '\\' && src[1] != NUL) 3705 { 3706 *dst++ = *src++; 3707 --dstlen; 3708 } 3709 else if (src[0] == ' ' || src[0] == ',') 3710 at_start = TRUE; 3711 *dst++ = *src++; 3712 --dstlen; 3713 3714 if (startstr != NULL && src - startstr_len >= srcp 3715 && STRNCMP(src - startstr_len, startstr, startstr_len) == 0) 3716 at_start = TRUE; 3717 } 3718 } 3719 *dst = NUL; 3720 } 3721 3722 /* 3723 * Vim's version of getenv(). 3724 * Special handling of $HOME, $VIM and $VIMRUNTIME. 3725 * Also does ACP to 'enc' conversion for Win32. 3726 */ 3727 char_u * 3728 vim_getenv(name, mustfree) 3729 char_u *name; 3730 int *mustfree; /* set to TRUE when returned is allocated */ 3731 { 3732 char_u *p; 3733 char_u *pend; 3734 int vimruntime; 3735 3736 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) 3737 /* use "C:/" when $HOME is not set */ 3738 if (STRCMP(name, "HOME") == 0) 3739 return homedir; 3740 #endif 3741 3742 p = mch_getenv(name); 3743 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */ 3744 p = NULL; 3745 3746 if (p != NULL) 3747 { 3748 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264) 3749 if (enc_utf8) 3750 { 3751 int len; 3752 char_u *pp; 3753 3754 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are 3755 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */ 3756 acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len); 3757 if (pp != NULL) 3758 { 3759 p = pp; 3760 *mustfree = TRUE; 3761 } 3762 } 3763 #endif 3764 return p; 3765 } 3766 3767 vimruntime = (STRCMP(name, "VIMRUNTIME") == 0); 3768 if (!vimruntime && STRCMP(name, "VIM") != 0) 3769 return NULL; 3770 3771 /* 3772 * When expanding $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using $VIM/vim<version> or $VIM. 3773 * Don't do this when default_vimruntime_dir is non-empty. 3774 */ 3775 if (vimruntime 3776 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF 3777 && *default_vimruntime_dir == NUL 3778 #endif 3779 ) 3780 { 3781 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM"); 3782 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */ 3783 p = NULL; 3784 if (p != NULL) 3785 { 3786 p = vim_version_dir(p); 3787 if (p != NULL) 3788 *mustfree = TRUE; 3789 else 3790 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM"); 3791 3792 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264) 3793 if (enc_utf8) 3794 { 3795 int len; 3796 char_u *pp; 3797 3798 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions 3799 * are not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII 3800 * characters. */ 3801 acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len); 3802 if (pp != NULL) 3803 { 3804 if (mustfree) 3805 vim_free(p); 3806 p = pp; 3807 *mustfree = TRUE; 3808 } 3809 } 3810 #endif 3811 } 3812 } 3813 3814 /* 3815 * When expanding $VIM or $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using: 3816 * - the directory name from 'helpfile' (unless it contains '$') 3817 * - the executable name from argv[0] 3818 */ 3819 if (p == NULL) 3820 { 3821 if (p_hf != NULL && vim_strchr(p_hf, '$') == NULL) 3822 p = p_hf; 3823 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME 3824 /* 3825 * Use the name of the executable, obtained from argv[0]. 3826 */ 3827 else 3828 p = exe_name; 3829 #endif 3830 if (p != NULL) 3831 { 3832 /* remove the file name */ 3833 pend = gettail(p); 3834 3835 /* remove "doc/" from 'helpfile', if present */ 3836 if (p == p_hf) 3837 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"doc"); 3838 3839 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME 3840 # ifdef MACOS_X 3841 /* remove "build/..." from exe_name, if present */ 3842 if (p == exe_name) 3843 { 3844 char_u *pend1; 3845 char_u *pend2; 3846 3847 pend1 = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"Contents/MacOS"); 3848 pend2 = remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend1, (char_u *)".app"); 3849 pend = remove_tail(p, pend2, (char_u *)"build"); 3850 /* When runnig from project builder get rid of the 3851 * build/???.app, otherwise keep the ???.app */ 3852 if (pend2 == pend) 3853 pend = pend1; 3854 } 3855 # endif 3856 /* remove "src/" from exe_name, if present */ 3857 if (p == exe_name) 3858 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"src"); 3859 #endif 3860 3861 /* for $VIM, remove "runtime/" or "vim54/", if present */ 3862 if (!vimruntime) 3863 { 3864 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME); 3865 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT); 3866 } 3867 3868 /* remove trailing path separator */ 3869 #ifndef MACOS_CLASSIC 3870 /* With MacOS path (with colons) the final colon is required */ 3871 /* to avoid confusion between absoulute and relative path */ 3872 if (pend > p && after_pathsep(p, pend)) 3873 --pend; 3874 #endif 3875 3876 /* check that the result is a directory name */ 3877 p = vim_strnsave(p, (int)(pend - p)); 3878 3879 if (p != NULL && !mch_isdir(p)) 3880 { 3881 vim_free(p); 3882 p = NULL; 3883 } 3884 else 3885 { 3886 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME 3887 /* may add "/vim54" or "/runtime" if it exists */ 3888 if (vimruntime && (pend = vim_version_dir(p)) != NULL) 3889 { 3890 vim_free(p); 3891 p = pend; 3892 } 3893 #endif 3894 *mustfree = TRUE; 3895 } 3896 } 3897 } 3898 3899 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF 3900 /* When there is a pathdef.c file we can use default_vim_dir and 3901 * default_vimruntime_dir */ 3902 if (p == NULL) 3903 { 3904 /* Only use default_vimruntime_dir when it is not empty */ 3905 if (vimruntime && *default_vimruntime_dir != NUL) 3906 { 3907 p = default_vimruntime_dir; 3908 *mustfree = FALSE; 3909 } 3910 else if (*default_vim_dir != NUL) 3911 { 3912 if (vimruntime && (p = vim_version_dir(default_vim_dir)) != NULL) 3913 *mustfree = TRUE; 3914 else 3915 { 3916 p = default_vim_dir; 3917 *mustfree = FALSE; 3918 } 3919 } 3920 } 3921 #endif 3922 3923 /* 3924 * Set the environment variable, so that the new value can be found fast 3925 * next time, and others can also use it (e.g. Perl). 3926 */ 3927 if (p != NULL) 3928 { 3929 if (vimruntime) 3930 { 3931 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIMRUNTIME", p); 3932 didset_vimruntime = TRUE; 3933 #ifdef FEAT_GETTEXT 3934 { 3935 char_u *buf = concat_str(p, (char_u *)"/lang"); 3936 3937 if (buf != NULL) 3938 { 3939 bindtextdomain(VIMPACKAGE, (char *)buf); 3940 vim_free(buf); 3941 } 3942 } 3943 #endif 3944 } 3945 else 3946 { 3947 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIM", p); 3948 didset_vim = TRUE; 3949 } 3950 } 3951 return p; 3952 } 3953 3954 /* 3955 * Check if the directory "vimdir/<version>" or "vimdir/runtime" exists. 3956 * Return NULL if not, return its name in allocated memory otherwise. 3957 */ 3958 static char_u * 3959 vim_version_dir(vimdir) 3960 char_u *vimdir; 3961 { 3962 char_u *p; 3963 3964 if (vimdir == NULL || *vimdir == NUL) 3965 return NULL; 3966 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT, TRUE); 3967 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p)) 3968 return p; 3969 vim_free(p); 3970 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME, TRUE); 3971 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p)) 3972 return p; 3973 vim_free(p); 3974 return NULL; 3975 } 3976 3977 /* 3978 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "name/", return "pend" minus 3979 * the length of "name/". Otherwise return "pend". 3980 */ 3981 static char_u * 3982 remove_tail(p, pend, name) 3983 char_u *p; 3984 char_u *pend; 3985 char_u *name; 3986 { 3987 int len = (int)STRLEN(name) + 1; 3988 char_u *newend = pend - len; 3989 3990 if (newend >= p 3991 && fnamencmp(newend, name, len - 1) == 0 3992 && (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend))) 3993 return newend; 3994 return pend; 3995 } 3996 3997 #if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X) 3998 /* 3999 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "???.ext/", return "pend" 4000 * minus the length of "???.ext/". Otherwise return "pend". 4001 */ 4002 static char_u * 4003 remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend, ext) 4004 char_u *p; 4005 char_u *pend; 4006 char_u *ext; 4007 { 4008 int len = (int)STRLEN(ext) + 1; 4009 char_u *newend = pend - len; 4010 4011 if (newend >= p && fnamencmp(newend, ext, len - 1) == 0) 4012 while (newend > p && !after_pathsep(p, newend)) 4013 mb_ptr_back(p, newend); 4014 if (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend)) 4015 return newend; 4016 return pend; 4017 } 4018 #endif 4019 4020 /* 4021 * Call expand_env() and store the result in an allocated string. 4022 * This is not very memory efficient, this expects the result to be freed 4023 * again soon. 4024 */ 4025 char_u * 4026 expand_env_save(src) 4027 char_u *src; 4028 { 4029 char_u *p; 4030 4031 p = alloc(MAXPATHL); 4032 if (p != NULL) 4033 expand_env(src, p, MAXPATHL); 4034 return p; 4035 } 4036 4037 /* 4038 * Our portable version of setenv. 4039 */ 4040 void 4041 vim_setenv(name, val) 4042 char_u *name; 4043 char_u *val; 4044 { 4045 #ifdef HAVE_SETENV 4046 mch_setenv((char *)name, (char *)val, 1); 4047 #else 4048 char_u *envbuf; 4049 4050 /* 4051 * Putenv does not copy the string, it has to remain 4052 * valid. The allocated memory will never be freed. 4053 */ 4054 envbuf = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(name) + STRLEN(val) + 2)); 4055 if (envbuf != NULL) 4056 { 4057 sprintf((char *)envbuf, "%s=%s", name, val); 4058 putenv((char *)envbuf); 4059 } 4060 #endif 4061 } 4062 4063 #if defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO) 4064 /* 4065 * Function given to ExpandGeneric() to obtain an environment variable name. 4066 */ 4067 /*ARGSUSED*/ 4068 char_u * 4069 get_env_name(xp, idx) 4070 expand_T *xp; 4071 int idx; 4072 { 4073 # if defined(AMIGA) || defined(__MRC__) || defined(__SC__) 4074 /* 4075 * No environ[] on the Amiga and on the Mac (using MPW). 4076 */ 4077 return NULL; 4078 # else 4079 # ifndef __WIN32__ 4080 /* Borland C++ 5.2 has this in a header file. */ 4081 extern char **environ; 4082 # endif 4083 # define ENVNAMELEN 100 4084 static char_u name[ENVNAMELEN]; 4085 char_u *str; 4086 int n; 4087 4088 str = (char_u *)environ[idx]; 4089 if (str == NULL) 4090 return NULL; 4091 4092 for (n = 0; n < ENVNAMELEN - 1; ++n) 4093 { 4094 if (str[n] == '=' || str[n] == NUL) 4095 break; 4096 name[n] = str[n]; 4097 } 4098 name[n] = NUL; 4099 return name; 4100 # endif 4101 } 4102 #endif 4103 4104 /* 4105 * Replace home directory by "~" in each space or comma separated file name in 4106 * 'src'. 4107 * If anything fails (except when out of space) dst equals src. 4108 */ 4109 void 4110 home_replace(buf, src, dst, dstlen, one) 4111 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */ 4112 char_u *src; /* input file name */ 4113 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */ 4114 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */ 4115 int one; /* if TRUE, only replace one file name, include 4116 spaces and commas in the file name. */ 4117 { 4118 size_t dirlen = 0, envlen = 0; 4119 size_t len; 4120 char_u *homedir_env; 4121 char_u *p; 4122 4123 if (src == NULL) 4124 { 4125 *dst = NUL; 4126 return; 4127 } 4128 4129 /* 4130 * If the file is a help file, remove the path completely. 4131 */ 4132 if (buf != NULL && buf->b_help) 4133 { 4134 STRCPY(dst, gettail(src)); 4135 return; 4136 } 4137 4138 /* 4139 * We check both the value of the $HOME environment variable and the 4140 * "real" home directory. 4141 */ 4142 if (homedir != NULL) 4143 dirlen = STRLEN(homedir); 4144 4145 #ifdef VMS 4146 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN"); 4147 #else 4148 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME"); 4149 #endif 4150 4151 if (homedir_env != NULL && *homedir_env == NUL) 4152 homedir_env = NULL; 4153 if (homedir_env != NULL) 4154 envlen = STRLEN(homedir_env); 4155 4156 if (!one) 4157 src = skipwhite(src); 4158 while (*src && dstlen > 0) 4159 { 4160 /* 4161 * Here we are at the beginning of a file name. 4162 * First, check to see if the beginning of the file name matches 4163 * $HOME or the "real" home directory. Check that there is a '/' 4164 * after the match (so that if e.g. the file is "/home/pieter/bla", 4165 * and the home directory is "/home/piet", the file does not end up 4166 * as "~er/bla" (which would seem to indicate the file "bla" in user 4167 * er's home directory)). 4168 */ 4169 p = homedir; 4170 len = dirlen; 4171 for (;;) 4172 { 4173 if ( len 4174 && fnamencmp(src, p, len) == 0 4175 && (vim_ispathsep(src[len]) 4176 || (!one && (src[len] == ',' || src[len] == ' ')) 4177 || src[len] == NUL)) 4178 { 4179 src += len; 4180 if (--dstlen > 0) 4181 *dst++ = '~'; 4182 4183 /* 4184 * If it's just the home directory, add "/". 4185 */ 4186 if (!vim_ispathsep(src[0]) && --dstlen > 0) 4187 *dst++ = '/'; 4188 break; 4189 } 4190 if (p == homedir_env) 4191 break; 4192 p = homedir_env; 4193 len = envlen; 4194 } 4195 4196 /* if (!one) skip to separator: space or comma */ 4197 while (*src && (one || (*src != ',' && *src != ' ')) && --dstlen > 0) 4198 *dst++ = *src++; 4199 /* skip separator */ 4200 while ((*src == ' ' || *src == ',') && --dstlen > 0) 4201 *dst++ = *src++; 4202 } 4203 /* if (dstlen == 0) out of space, what to do??? */ 4204 4205 *dst = NUL; 4206 } 4207 4208 /* 4209 * Like home_replace, store the replaced string in allocated memory. 4210 * When something fails, NULL is returned. 4211 */ 4212 char_u * 4213 home_replace_save(buf, src) 4214 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */ 4215 char_u *src; /* input file name */ 4216 { 4217 char_u *dst; 4218 unsigned len; 4219 4220 len = 3; /* space for "~/" and trailing NUL */ 4221 if (src != NULL) /* just in case */ 4222 len += (unsigned)STRLEN(src); 4223 dst = alloc(len); 4224 if (dst != NULL) 4225 home_replace(buf, src, dst, len, TRUE); 4226 return dst; 4227 } 4228 4229 /* 4230 * Compare two file names and return: 4231 * FPC_SAME if they both exist and are the same file. 4232 * FPC_SAMEX if they both don't exist and have the same file name. 4233 * FPC_DIFF if they both exist and are different files. 4234 * FPC_NOTX if they both don't exist. 4235 * FPC_DIFFX if one of them doesn't exist. 4236 * For the first name environment variables are expanded 4237 */ 4238 int 4239 fullpathcmp(s1, s2, checkname) 4240 char_u *s1, *s2; 4241 int checkname; /* when both don't exist, check file names */ 4242 { 4243 #ifdef UNIX 4244 char_u exp1[MAXPATHL]; 4245 char_u full1[MAXPATHL]; 4246 char_u full2[MAXPATHL]; 4247 struct stat st1, st2; 4248 int r1, r2; 4249 4250 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL); 4251 r1 = mch_stat((char *)exp1, &st1); 4252 r2 = mch_stat((char *)s2, &st2); 4253 if (r1 != 0 && r2 != 0) 4254 { 4255 /* if mch_stat() doesn't work, may compare the names */ 4256 if (checkname) 4257 { 4258 if (fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0) 4259 return FPC_SAMEX; 4260 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE); 4261 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE); 4262 if (r1 == OK && r2 == OK && fnamecmp(full1, full2) == 0) 4263 return FPC_SAMEX; 4264 } 4265 return FPC_NOTX; 4266 } 4267 if (r1 != 0 || r2 != 0) 4268 return FPC_DIFFX; 4269 if (st1.st_dev == st2.st_dev && st1.st_ino == st2.st_ino) 4270 return FPC_SAME; 4271 return FPC_DIFF; 4272 #else 4273 char_u *exp1; /* expanded s1 */ 4274 char_u *full1; /* full path of s1 */ 4275 char_u *full2; /* full path of s2 */ 4276 int retval = FPC_DIFF; 4277 int r1, r2; 4278 4279 /* allocate one buffer to store three paths (alloc()/free() is slow!) */ 4280 if ((exp1 = alloc(MAXPATHL * 3)) != NULL) 4281 { 4282 full1 = exp1 + MAXPATHL; 4283 full2 = full1 + MAXPATHL; 4284 4285 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL); 4286 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE); 4287 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE); 4288 4289 /* If vim_FullName() fails, the file probably doesn't exist. */ 4290 if (r1 != OK && r2 != OK) 4291 { 4292 if (checkname && fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0) 4293 retval = FPC_SAMEX; 4294 else 4295 retval = FPC_NOTX; 4296 } 4297 else if (r1 != OK || r2 != OK) 4298 retval = FPC_DIFFX; 4299 else if (fnamecmp(full1, full2)) 4300 retval = FPC_DIFF; 4301 else 4302 retval = FPC_SAME; 4303 vim_free(exp1); 4304 } 4305 return retval; 4306 #endif 4307 } 4308 4309 /* 4310 * Get the tail of a path: the file name. 4311 * Fail safe: never returns NULL. 4312 */ 4313 char_u * 4314 gettail(fname) 4315 char_u *fname; 4316 { 4317 char_u *p1, *p2; 4318 4319 if (fname == NULL) 4320 return (char_u *)""; 4321 for (p1 = p2 = fname; *p2; ) /* find last part of path */ 4322 { 4323 if (vim_ispathsep(*p2)) 4324 p1 = p2 + 1; 4325 mb_ptr_adv(p2); 4326 } 4327 return p1; 4328 } 4329 4330 /* 4331 * Get pointer to tail of "fname", including path separators. Putting a NUL 4332 * here leaves the directory name. Takes care of "c:/" and "//". 4333 * Always returns a valid pointer. 4334 */ 4335 char_u * 4336 gettail_sep(fname) 4337 char_u *fname; 4338 { 4339 char_u *p; 4340 char_u *t; 4341 4342 p = get_past_head(fname); /* don't remove the '/' from "c:/file" */ 4343 t = gettail(fname); 4344 while (t > p && after_pathsep(fname, t)) 4345 --t; 4346 #ifdef VMS 4347 /* path separator is part of the path */ 4348 ++t; 4349 #endif 4350 return t; 4351 } 4352 4353 /* 4354 * get the next path component (just after the next path separator). 4355 */ 4356 char_u * 4357 getnextcomp(fname) 4358 char_u *fname; 4359 { 4360 while (*fname && !vim_ispathsep(*fname)) 4361 mb_ptr_adv(fname); 4362 if (*fname) 4363 ++fname; 4364 return fname; 4365 } 4366 4367 /* 4368 * Get a pointer to one character past the head of a path name. 4369 * Unix: after "/"; DOS: after "c:\"; Amiga: after "disk:/"; Mac: no head. 4370 * If there is no head, path is returned. 4371 */ 4372 char_u * 4373 get_past_head(path) 4374 char_u *path; 4375 { 4376 char_u *retval; 4377 4378 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) 4379 /* may skip "c:" */ 4380 if (isalpha(path[0]) && path[1] == ':') 4381 retval = path + 2; 4382 else 4383 retval = path; 4384 #else 4385 # if defined(AMIGA) 4386 /* may skip "label:" */ 4387 retval = vim_strchr(path, ':'); 4388 if (retval == NULL) 4389 retval = path; 4390 # else /* Unix */ 4391 retval = path; 4392 # endif 4393 #endif 4394 4395 while (vim_ispathsep(*retval)) 4396 ++retval; 4397 4398 return retval; 4399 } 4400 4401 /* 4402 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path separator. 4403 */ 4404 int 4405 vim_ispathsep(c) 4406 int c; 4407 { 4408 #ifdef RISCOS 4409 return (c == '.' || c == ':'); 4410 #else 4411 # ifdef UNIX 4412 return (c == '/'); /* UNIX has ':' inside file names */ 4413 # else 4414 # ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME 4415 return (c == ':' || c == '/' || c == '\\'); 4416 # else 4417 # ifdef VMS 4418 /* server"user passwd"::device:[full.path.name]fname.extension;version" */ 4419 return (c == ':' || c == '[' || c == ']' || c == '/' 4420 || c == '<' || c == '>' || c == '"' ); 4421 # else 4422 # ifdef COLON_AS_PATHSEP 4423 return (c == ':'); 4424 # else /* Amiga */ 4425 return (c == ':' || c == '/'); 4426 # endif 4427 # endif /* VMS */ 4428 # endif 4429 # endif 4430 #endif /* RISC OS */ 4431 } 4432 4433 #if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(PROTO) 4434 /* 4435 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path list separator. 4436 */ 4437 int 4438 vim_ispathlistsep(c) 4439 int c; 4440 { 4441 #ifdef UNIX 4442 return (c == ':'); 4443 #else 4444 return (c == ';'); /* might not be rigth for every system... */ 4445 #endif 4446 } 4447 #endif 4448 4449 /* 4450 * Return TRUE if the directory of "fname" exists, FALSE otherwise. 4451 * Also returns TRUE if there is no directory name. 4452 * "fname" must be writable!. 4453 */ 4454 int 4455 dir_of_file_exists(fname) 4456 char_u *fname; 4457 { 4458 char_u *p; 4459 int c; 4460 int retval; 4461 4462 p = gettail_sep(fname); 4463 if (p == fname) 4464 return TRUE; 4465 c = *p; 4466 *p = NUL; 4467 retval = mch_isdir(fname); 4468 *p = c; 4469 return retval; 4470 } 4471 4472 #if (defined(CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME) && defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME)) \ 4473 || defined(PROTO) 4474 /* 4475 * Versions of fnamecmp() and fnamencmp() that handle '/' and '\' equally. 4476 */ 4477 int 4478 vim_fnamecmp(x, y) 4479 char_u *x, *y; 4480 { 4481 return vim_fnamencmp(x, y, MAXPATHL); 4482 } 4483 4484 int 4485 vim_fnamencmp(x, y, len) 4486 char_u *x, *y; 4487 size_t len; 4488 { 4489 while (len > 0 && *x && *y) 4490 { 4491 if (TOLOWER_LOC(*x) != TOLOWER_LOC(*y) 4492 && !(*x == '/' && *y == '\\') 4493 && !(*x == '\\' && *y == '/')) 4494 break; 4495 ++x; 4496 ++y; 4497 --len; 4498 } 4499 if (len == 0) 4500 return 0; 4501 return (*x - *y); 4502 } 4503 #endif 4504 4505 /* 4506 * Concatenate file names fname1 and fname2 into allocated memory. 4507 * Only add a '/' or '\\' when 'sep' is TRUE and it is neccesary. 4508 */ 4509 char_u * 4510 concat_fnames(fname1, fname2, sep) 4511 char_u *fname1; 4512 char_u *fname2; 4513 int sep; 4514 { 4515 char_u *dest; 4516 4517 dest = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(fname1) + STRLEN(fname2) + 3)); 4518 if (dest != NULL) 4519 { 4520 STRCPY(dest, fname1); 4521 if (sep) 4522 add_pathsep(dest); 4523 STRCAT(dest, fname2); 4524 } 4525 return dest; 4526 } 4527 4528 #if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(FEAT_GETTEXT) || defined(PROTO) 4529 /* 4530 * Concatenate two strings and return the result in allocated memory. 4531 * Returns NULL when out of memory. 4532 */ 4533 char_u * 4534 concat_str(str1, str2) 4535 char_u *str1; 4536 char_u *str2; 4537 { 4538 char_u *dest; 4539 size_t l = STRLEN(str1); 4540 4541 dest = alloc((unsigned)(l + STRLEN(str2) + 1L)); 4542 if (dest != NULL) 4543 { 4544 STRCPY(dest, str1); 4545 STRCPY(dest + l, str2); 4546 } 4547 return dest; 4548 } 4549 #endif 4550 4551 /* 4552 * Add a path separator to a file name, unless it already ends in a path 4553 * separator. 4554 */ 4555 void 4556 add_pathsep(p) 4557 char_u *p; 4558 { 4559 if (*p != NUL && !after_pathsep(p, p + STRLEN(p))) 4560 STRCAT(p, PATHSEPSTR); 4561 } 4562 4563 /* 4564 * FullName_save - Make an allocated copy of a full file name. 4565 * Returns NULL when out of memory. 4566 */ 4567 char_u * 4568 FullName_save(fname, force) 4569 char_u *fname; 4570 int force; /* force expansion, even when it already looks 4571 like a full path name */ 4572 { 4573 char_u *buf; 4574 char_u *new_fname = NULL; 4575 4576 if (fname == NULL) 4577 return NULL; 4578 4579 buf = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL); 4580 if (buf != NULL) 4581 { 4582 if (vim_FullName(fname, buf, MAXPATHL, force) != FAIL) 4583 new_fname = vim_strsave(buf); 4584 else 4585 new_fname = vim_strsave(fname); 4586 vim_free(buf); 4587 } 4588 return new_fname; 4589 } 4590 4591 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SYN_HL) 4592 4593 static char_u *skip_string __ARGS((char_u *p)); 4594 4595 /* 4596 * Find the start of a comment, not knowing if we are in a comment right now. 4597 * Search starts at w_cursor.lnum and goes backwards. 4598 */ 4599 pos_T * 4600 find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */ 4601 int ind_maxcomment; 4602 { 4603 pos_T *pos; 4604 char_u *line; 4605 char_u *p; 4606 4607 if ((pos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '*', FM_BACKWARD, ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) 4608 return NULL; 4609 4610 /* 4611 * Check if the comment start we found is inside a string. 4612 */ 4613 line = ml_get(pos->lnum); 4614 for (p = line; *p && (unsigned)(p - line) < pos->col; ++p) 4615 p = skip_string(p); 4616 if ((unsigned)(p - line) > pos->col) 4617 return NULL; 4618 return pos; 4619 } 4620 4621 /* 4622 * Skip to the end of a "string" and a 'c' character. 4623 * If there is no string or character, return argument unmodified. 4624 */ 4625 static char_u * 4626 skip_string(p) 4627 char_u *p; 4628 { 4629 int i; 4630 4631 /* 4632 * We loop, because strings may be concatenated: "date""time". 4633 */ 4634 for ( ; ; ++p) 4635 { 4636 if (p[0] == '\'') /* 'c' or '\n' or '\000' */ 4637 { 4638 if (!p[1]) /* ' at end of line */ 4639 break; 4640 i = 2; 4641 if (p[1] == '\\') /* '\n' or '\000' */ 4642 { 4643 ++i; 4644 while (vim_isdigit(p[i - 1])) /* '\000' */ 4645 ++i; 4646 } 4647 if (p[i] == '\'') /* check for trailing ' */ 4648 { 4649 p += i; 4650 continue; 4651 } 4652 } 4653 else if (p[0] == '"') /* start of string */ 4654 { 4655 for (++p; p[0]; ++p) 4656 { 4657 if (p[0] == '\\' && p[1] != NUL) 4658 ++p; 4659 else if (p[0] == '"') /* end of string */ 4660 break; 4661 } 4662 if (p[0] == '"') 4663 continue; 4664 } 4665 break; /* no string found */ 4666 } 4667 if (!*p) 4668 --p; /* backup from NUL */ 4669 return p; 4670 } 4671 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT || FEAT_SYN_HL */ 4672 4673 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(PROTO) 4674 4675 /* 4676 * Do C or expression indenting on the current line. 4677 */ 4678 void 4679 do_c_expr_indent() 4680 { 4681 # ifdef FEAT_EVAL 4682 if (*curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL) 4683 fixthisline(get_expr_indent); 4684 else 4685 # endif 4686 fixthisline(get_c_indent); 4687 } 4688 4689 /* 4690 * Functions for C-indenting. 4691 * Most of this originally comes from Eric Fischer. 4692 */ 4693 /* 4694 * Below "XXX" means that this function may unlock the current line. 4695 */ 4696 4697 static char_u *cin_skipcomment __ARGS((char_u *)); 4698 static int cin_nocode __ARGS((char_u *)); 4699 static pos_T *find_line_comment __ARGS((void)); 4700 static int cin_islabel_skip __ARGS((char_u **)); 4701 static int cin_isdefault __ARGS((char_u *)); 4702 static char_u *after_label __ARGS((char_u *l)); 4703 static int get_indent_nolabel __ARGS((linenr_T lnum)); 4704 static int skip_label __ARGS((linenr_T, char_u **pp, int ind_maxcomment)); 4705 static int cin_first_id_amount __ARGS((void)); 4706 static int cin_get_equal_amount __ARGS((linenr_T lnum)); 4707 static int cin_ispreproc __ARGS((char_u *)); 4708 static int cin_ispreproc_cont __ARGS((char_u **pp, linenr_T *lnump)); 4709 static int cin_iscomment __ARGS((char_u *)); 4710 static int cin_islinecomment __ARGS((char_u *)); 4711 static int cin_isterminated __ARGS((char_u *, int, int)); 4712 static int cin_isinit __ARGS((void)); 4713 static int cin_isfuncdecl __ARGS((char_u **, linenr_T)); 4714 static int cin_isif __ARGS((char_u *)); 4715 static int cin_iselse __ARGS((char_u *)); 4716 static int cin_isdo __ARGS((char_u *)); 4717 static int cin_iswhileofdo __ARGS((char_u *, linenr_T, int)); 4718 static int cin_isbreak __ARGS((char_u *)); 4719 static int cin_is_cpp_baseclass __ARGS((char_u *line, colnr_T *col)); 4720 static int cin_ends_in __ARGS((char_u *, char_u *, char_u *)); 4721 static int cin_skip2pos __ARGS((pos_T *trypos)); 4722 static pos_T *find_start_brace __ARGS((int)); 4723 static pos_T *find_match_paren __ARGS((int, int)); 4724 static int corr_ind_maxparen __ARGS((int ind_maxparen, pos_T *startpos)); 4725 static int find_last_paren __ARGS((char_u *l, int start, int end)); 4726 static int find_match __ARGS((int lookfor, linenr_T ourscope, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment)); 4727 4728 /* 4729 * Skip over white space and C comments within the line. 4730 */ 4731 static char_u * 4732 cin_skipcomment(s) 4733 char_u *s; 4734 { 4735 while (*s) 4736 { 4737 s = skipwhite(s); 4738 if (*s != '/') 4739 break; 4740 ++s; 4741 if (*s == '/') /* slash-slash comment continues till eol */ 4742 { 4743 s += STRLEN(s); 4744 break; 4745 } 4746 if (*s != '*') 4747 break; 4748 for (++s; *s; ++s) /* skip slash-star comment */ 4749 if (s[0] == '*' && s[1] == '/') 4750 { 4751 s += 2; 4752 break; 4753 } 4754 } 4755 return s; 4756 } 4757 4758 /* 4759 * Return TRUE if there there is no code at *s. White space and comments are 4760 * not considered code. 4761 */ 4762 static int 4763 cin_nocode(s) 4764 char_u *s; 4765 { 4766 return *cin_skipcomment(s) == NUL; 4767 } 4768 4769 /* 4770 * Check previous lines for a "//" line comment, skipping over blank lines. 4771 */ 4772 static pos_T * 4773 find_line_comment() /* XXX */ 4774 { 4775 static pos_T pos; 4776 char_u *line; 4777 char_u *p; 4778 4779 pos = curwin->w_cursor; 4780 while (--pos.lnum > 0) 4781 { 4782 line = ml_get(pos.lnum); 4783 p = skipwhite(line); 4784 if (cin_islinecomment(p)) 4785 { 4786 pos.col = (int)(p - line); 4787 return &pos; 4788 } 4789 if (*p != NUL) 4790 break; 4791 } 4792 return NULL; 4793 } 4794 4795 /* 4796 * Check if string matches "label:"; move to character after ':' if true. 4797 */ 4798 static int 4799 cin_islabel_skip(s) 4800 char_u **s; 4801 { 4802 if (!vim_isIDc(**s)) /* need at least one ID character */ 4803 return FALSE; 4804 4805 while (vim_isIDc(**s)) 4806 (*s)++; 4807 4808 *s = cin_skipcomment(*s); 4809 4810 /* "::" is not a label, it's C++ */ 4811 return (**s == ':' && *++*s != ':'); 4812 } 4813 4814 /* 4815 * Recognize a label: "label:". 4816 * Note: curwin->w_cursor must be where we are looking for the label. 4817 */ 4818 int 4819 cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */ 4820 int ind_maxcomment; 4821 { 4822 char_u *s; 4823 4824 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 4825 4826 /* 4827 * Exclude "default" from labels, since it should be indented 4828 * like a switch label. Same for C++ scope declarations. 4829 */ 4830 if (cin_isdefault(s)) 4831 return FALSE; 4832 if (cin_isscopedecl(s)) 4833 return FALSE; 4834 4835 if (cin_islabel_skip(&s)) 4836 { 4837 /* 4838 * Only accept a label if the previous line is terminated or is a case 4839 * label. 4840 */ 4841 pos_T cursor_save; 4842 pos_T *trypos; 4843 char_u *line; 4844 4845 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 4846 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 4847 { 4848 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 4849 4850 /* 4851 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment. 4852 */ 4853 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 4854 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */ 4855 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos; 4856 4857 line = ml_get_curline(); 4858 if (cin_ispreproc(line)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */ 4859 continue; 4860 if (*(line = cin_skipcomment(line)) == NUL) 4861 continue; 4862 4863 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 4864 if (cin_isterminated(line, TRUE, FALSE) 4865 || cin_isscopedecl(line) 4866 || cin_iscase(line) 4867 || (cin_islabel_skip(&line) && cin_nocode(line))) 4868 return TRUE; 4869 return FALSE; 4870 } 4871 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 4872 return TRUE; /* label at start of file??? */ 4873 } 4874 return FALSE; 4875 } 4876 4877 /* 4878 * Recognize structure initialization and enumerations. 4879 * Q&D-Implementation: 4880 * check for "=" at end or "[typedef] enum" at beginning of line. 4881 */ 4882 static int 4883 cin_isinit(void) 4884 { 4885 char_u *s; 4886 4887 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 4888 4889 if (STRNCMP(s, "typedef", 7) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[7])) 4890 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7); 4891 4892 if (STRNCMP(s, "enum", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4])) 4893 return TRUE; 4894 4895 if (cin_ends_in(s, (char_u *)"=", (char_u *)"{")) 4896 return TRUE; 4897 4898 return FALSE; 4899 } 4900 4901 /* 4902 * Recognize a switch label: "case .*:" or "default:". 4903 */ 4904 int 4905 cin_iscase(s) 4906 char_u *s; 4907 { 4908 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 4909 if (STRNCMP(s, "case", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4])) 4910 { 4911 for (s += 4; *s; ++s) 4912 { 4913 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 4914 if (*s == ':') 4915 { 4916 if (s[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */ 4917 ++s; 4918 else 4919 return TRUE; 4920 } 4921 if (*s == '\'' && s[1] && s[2] == '\'') 4922 s += 2; /* skip over '.' */ 4923 else if (*s == '/' && (s[1] == '*' || s[1] == '/')) 4924 return FALSE; /* stop at comment */ 4925 else if (*s == '"') 4926 return FALSE; /* stop at string */ 4927 } 4928 return FALSE; 4929 } 4930 4931 if (cin_isdefault(s)) 4932 return TRUE; 4933 return FALSE; 4934 } 4935 4936 /* 4937 * Recognize a "default" switch label. 4938 */ 4939 static int 4940 cin_isdefault(s) 4941 char_u *s; 4942 { 4943 return (STRNCMP(s, "default", 7) == 0 4944 && *(s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7)) == ':' 4945 && s[1] != ':'); 4946 } 4947 4948 /* 4949 * Recognize a "public/private/proctected" scope declaration label. 4950 */ 4951 int 4952 cin_isscopedecl(s) 4953 char_u *s; 4954 { 4955 int i; 4956 4957 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 4958 if (STRNCMP(s, "public", 6) == 0) 4959 i = 6; 4960 else if (STRNCMP(s, "protected", 9) == 0) 4961 i = 9; 4962 else if (STRNCMP(s, "private", 7) == 0) 4963 i = 7; 4964 else 4965 return FALSE; 4966 return (*(s = cin_skipcomment(s + i)) == ':' && s[1] != ':'); 4967 } 4968 4969 /* 4970 * Return a pointer to the first non-empty non-comment character after a ':'. 4971 * Return NULL if not found. 4972 * case 234: a = b; 4973 * ^ 4974 */ 4975 static char_u * 4976 after_label(l) 4977 char_u *l; 4978 { 4979 for ( ; *l; ++l) 4980 { 4981 if (*l == ':') 4982 { 4983 if (l[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */ 4984 ++l; 4985 else if (!cin_iscase(l + 1)) 4986 break; 4987 } 4988 else if (*l == '\'' && l[1] && l[2] == '\'') 4989 l += 2; /* skip over 'x' */ 4990 } 4991 if (*l == NUL) 4992 return NULL; 4993 l = cin_skipcomment(l + 1); 4994 if (*l == NUL) 4995 return NULL; 4996 return l; 4997 } 4998 4999 /* 5000 * Get indent of line "lnum", skipping a label. 5001 * Return 0 if there is nothing after the label. 5002 */ 5003 static int 5004 get_indent_nolabel(lnum) /* XXX */ 5005 linenr_T lnum; 5006 { 5007 char_u *l; 5008 pos_T fp; 5009 colnr_T col; 5010 char_u *p; 5011 5012 l = ml_get(lnum); 5013 p = after_label(l); 5014 if (p == NULL) 5015 return 0; 5016 5017 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - l); 5018 fp.lnum = lnum; 5019 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL); 5020 return (int)col; 5021 } 5022 5023 /* 5024 * Find indent for line "lnum", ignoring any case or jump label. 5025 * Also return a pointer to the text (after the label). 5026 * label: if (asdf && asdfasdf) 5027 * ^ 5028 */ 5029 static int 5030 skip_label(lnum, pp, ind_maxcomment) 5031 linenr_T lnum; 5032 char_u **pp; 5033 int ind_maxcomment; 5034 { 5035 char_u *l; 5036 int amount; 5037 pos_T cursor_save; 5038 5039 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 5040 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum; 5041 l = ml_get_curline(); 5042 /* XXX */ 5043 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l) || cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)) 5044 { 5045 amount = get_indent_nolabel(lnum); 5046 l = after_label(ml_get_curline()); 5047 if (l == NULL) /* just in case */ 5048 l = ml_get_curline(); 5049 } 5050 else 5051 { 5052 amount = get_indent(); 5053 l = ml_get_curline(); 5054 } 5055 *pp = l; 5056 5057 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 5058 return amount; 5059 } 5060 5061 /* 5062 * Return the indent of the first variable name after a type in a declaration. 5063 * int a, indent of "a" 5064 * static struct foo b, indent of "b" 5065 * enum bla c, indent of "c" 5066 * Returns zero when it doesn't look like a declaration. 5067 */ 5068 static int 5069 cin_first_id_amount() 5070 { 5071 char_u *line, *p, *s; 5072 int len; 5073 pos_T fp; 5074 colnr_T col; 5075 5076 line = ml_get_curline(); 5077 p = skipwhite(line); 5078 len = skiptowhite(p) - p; 5079 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "static", 6) == 0) 5080 { 5081 p = skipwhite(p + 6); 5082 len = skiptowhite(p) - p; 5083 } 5084 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "struct", 6) == 0) 5085 p = skipwhite(p + 6); 5086 else if (len == 4 && STRNCMP(p, "enum", 4) == 0) 5087 p = skipwhite(p + 4); 5088 else if ((len == 8 && STRNCMP(p, "unsigned", 8) == 0) 5089 || (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "signed", 6) == 0)) 5090 { 5091 s = skipwhite(p + len); 5092 if ((STRNCMP(s, "int", 3) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[3])) 5093 || (STRNCMP(s, "long", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4])) 5094 || (STRNCMP(s, "short", 5) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[5])) 5095 || (STRNCMP(s, "char", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4]))) 5096 p = s; 5097 } 5098 for (len = 0; vim_isIDc(p[len]); ++len) 5099 ; 5100 if (len == 0 || !vim_iswhite(p[len]) || cin_nocode(p)) 5101 return 0; 5102 5103 p = skipwhite(p + len); 5104 fp.lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 5105 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - line); 5106 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL); 5107 return (int)col; 5108 } 5109 5110 /* 5111 * Return the indent of the first non-blank after an equal sign. 5112 * char *foo = "here"; 5113 * Return zero if no (useful) equal sign found. 5114 * Return -1 if the line above "lnum" ends in a backslash. 5115 * foo = "asdf\ 5116 * asdf\ 5117 * here"; 5118 */ 5119 static int 5120 cin_get_equal_amount(lnum) 5121 linenr_T lnum; 5122 { 5123 char_u *line; 5124 char_u *s; 5125 colnr_T col; 5126 pos_T fp; 5127 5128 if (lnum > 1) 5129 { 5130 line = ml_get(lnum - 1); 5131 if (*line != NUL && line[STRLEN(line) - 1] == '\\') 5132 return -1; 5133 } 5134 5135 line = s = ml_get(lnum); 5136 while (*s != NUL && vim_strchr((char_u *)"=;{}\"'", *s) == NULL) 5137 { 5138 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */ 5139 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5140 else 5141 ++s; 5142 } 5143 if (*s != '=') 5144 return 0; 5145 5146 s = skipwhite(s + 1); 5147 if (cin_nocode(s)) 5148 return 0; 5149 5150 if (*s == '"') /* nice alignment for continued strings */ 5151 ++s; 5152 5153 fp.lnum = lnum; 5154 fp.col = (colnr_T)(s - line); 5155 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL); 5156 return (int)col; 5157 } 5158 5159 /* 5160 * Recognize a preprocessor statement: Any line that starts with '#'. 5161 */ 5162 static int 5163 cin_ispreproc(s) 5164 char_u *s; 5165 { 5166 s = skipwhite(s); 5167 if (*s == '#') 5168 return TRUE; 5169 return FALSE; 5170 } 5171 5172 /* 5173 * Return TRUE if line "*pp" at "*lnump" is a preprocessor statement or a 5174 * continuation line of a preprocessor statement. Decrease "*lnump" to the 5175 * start and return the line in "*pp". 5176 */ 5177 static int 5178 cin_ispreproc_cont(pp, lnump) 5179 char_u **pp; 5180 linenr_T *lnump; 5181 { 5182 char_u *line = *pp; 5183 linenr_T lnum = *lnump; 5184 int retval = FALSE; 5185 5186 for (;;) 5187 { 5188 if (cin_ispreproc(line)) 5189 { 5190 retval = TRUE; 5191 *lnump = lnum; 5192 break; 5193 } 5194 if (lnum == 1) 5195 break; 5196 line = ml_get(--lnum); 5197 if (*line == NUL || line[STRLEN(line) - 1] != '\\') 5198 break; 5199 } 5200 5201 if (lnum != *lnump) 5202 *pp = ml_get(*lnump); 5203 return retval; 5204 } 5205 5206 /* 5207 * Recognize the start of a C or C++ comment. 5208 */ 5209 static int 5210 cin_iscomment(p) 5211 char_u *p; 5212 { 5213 return (p[0] == '/' && (p[1] == '*' || p[1] == '/')); 5214 } 5215 5216 /* 5217 * Recognize the start of a "//" comment. 5218 */ 5219 static int 5220 cin_islinecomment(p) 5221 char_u *p; 5222 { 5223 return (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '/'); 5224 } 5225 5226 /* 5227 * Recognize a line that starts with '{' or '}', or ends with ';', '{' or '}'. 5228 * Don't consider "} else" a terminated line. 5229 * Return the character terminating the line (ending char's have precedence if 5230 * both apply in order to determine initializations). 5231 */ 5232 static int 5233 cin_isterminated(s, incl_open, incl_comma) 5234 char_u *s; 5235 int incl_open; /* include '{' at the end as terminator */ 5236 int incl_comma; /* recognize a trailing comma */ 5237 { 5238 char_u found_start = 0; 5239 5240 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5241 5242 if (*s == '{' || (*s == '}' && !cin_iselse(s))) 5243 found_start = *s; 5244 5245 while (*s) 5246 { 5247 /* skip over comments, "" strings and 'c'haracters */ 5248 s = skip_string(cin_skipcomment(s)); 5249 if ((*s == ';' || (incl_open && *s == '{') || *s == '}' 5250 || (incl_comma && *s == ',')) 5251 && cin_nocode(s + 1)) 5252 return *s; 5253 5254 if (*s) 5255 s++; 5256 } 5257 return found_start; 5258 } 5259 5260 /* 5261 * Recognize the basic picture of a function declaration -- it needs to 5262 * have an open paren somewhere and a close paren at the end of the line and 5263 * no semicolons anywhere. 5264 * When a line ends in a comma we continue looking in the next line. 5265 * "sp" points to a string with the line. When looking at other lines it must 5266 * be restored to the line. When it's NULL fetch lines here. 5267 * "lnum" is where we start looking. 5268 */ 5269 static int 5270 cin_isfuncdecl(sp, first_lnum) 5271 char_u **sp; 5272 linenr_T first_lnum; 5273 { 5274 char_u *s; 5275 linenr_T lnum = first_lnum; 5276 int retval = FALSE; 5277 5278 if (sp == NULL) 5279 s = ml_get(lnum); 5280 else 5281 s = *sp; 5282 5283 while (*s && *s != '(' && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"') 5284 { 5285 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */ 5286 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5287 else 5288 ++s; 5289 } 5290 if (*s != '(') 5291 return FALSE; /* ';', ' or " before any () or no '(' */ 5292 5293 while (*s && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"') 5294 { 5295 if (*s == ')' && cin_nocode(s + 1)) 5296 { 5297 /* ')' at the end: may have found a match 5298 * Check for he previous line not to end in a backslash: 5299 * #if defined(x) && \ 5300 * defined(y) 5301 */ 5302 lnum = first_lnum - 1; 5303 s = ml_get(lnum); 5304 if (*s == NUL || s[STRLEN(s) - 1] != '\\') 5305 retval = TRUE; 5306 goto done; 5307 } 5308 if (*s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1)) 5309 { 5310 /* ',' at the end: continue looking in the next line */ 5311 if (lnum >= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count) 5312 break; 5313 5314 s = ml_get(++lnum); 5315 } 5316 else if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */ 5317 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5318 else 5319 ++s; 5320 } 5321 5322 done: 5323 if (lnum != first_lnum && sp != NULL) 5324 *sp = ml_get(first_lnum); 5325 5326 return retval; 5327 } 5328 5329 static int 5330 cin_isif(p) 5331 char_u *p; 5332 { 5333 return (STRNCMP(p, "if", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2])); 5334 } 5335 5336 static int 5337 cin_iselse(p) 5338 char_u *p; 5339 { 5340 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} else" */ 5341 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1); 5342 return (STRNCMP(p, "else", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[4])); 5343 } 5344 5345 static int 5346 cin_isdo(p) 5347 char_u *p; 5348 { 5349 return (STRNCMP(p, "do", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2])); 5350 } 5351 5352 /* 5353 * Check if this is a "while" that should have a matching "do". 5354 * We only accept a "while (condition) ;", with only white space between the 5355 * ')' and ';'. The condition may be spread over several lines. 5356 */ 5357 static int 5358 cin_iswhileofdo(p, lnum, ind_maxparen) /* XXX */ 5359 char_u *p; 5360 linenr_T lnum; 5361 int ind_maxparen; 5362 { 5363 pos_T cursor_save; 5364 pos_T *trypos; 5365 int retval = FALSE; 5366 5367 p = cin_skipcomment(p); 5368 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} while (cond);" */ 5369 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1); 5370 if (STRNCMP(p, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5])) 5371 { 5372 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 5373 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum; 5374 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 5375 p = ml_get_curline(); 5376 while (*p && *p != 'w') /* skip any '}', until the 'w' of the "while" */ 5377 { 5378 ++p; 5379 ++curwin->w_cursor.col; 5380 } 5381 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, 0, 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL 5382 && *cin_skipcomment(ml_get_pos(trypos) + 1) == ';') 5383 retval = TRUE; 5384 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 5385 } 5386 return retval; 5387 } 5388 5389 static int 5390 cin_isbreak(p) 5391 char_u *p; 5392 { 5393 return (STRNCMP(p, "break", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5])); 5394 } 5395 5396 /* Find the position of a C++ base-class declaration or 5397 * constructor-initialization. eg: 5398 * 5399 * class MyClass : 5400 * baseClass <-- here 5401 * class MyClass : public baseClass, 5402 * anotherBaseClass <-- here (should probably lineup ??) 5403 * MyClass::MyClass(...) : 5404 * baseClass(...) <-- here (constructor-initialization) 5405 */ 5406 static int 5407 cin_is_cpp_baseclass(line, col) 5408 char_u *line; 5409 colnr_T *col; 5410 { 5411 char_u *s; 5412 int class_or_struct, lookfor_ctor_init, cpp_base_class; 5413 5414 *col = 0; 5415 5416 s = skipwhite(line); 5417 if (*s == '#') /* skip #define FOO x ? (x) : x */ 5418 return FALSE; 5419 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5420 if (*s == NUL) 5421 return FALSE; 5422 5423 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE; 5424 5425 while(*s != NUL) 5426 { 5427 if (s[0] == ':') 5428 { 5429 if (s[1] == ':') 5430 { 5431 /* skip double colon. It can't be a constructor 5432 * initialization any more */ 5433 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE; 5434 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 2); 5435 } 5436 else if (lookfor_ctor_init || class_or_struct) 5437 { 5438 /* we have something found, that looks like the start of 5439 * cpp-base-class-declaration or contructor-initialization */ 5440 cpp_base_class = TRUE; 5441 lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE; 5442 *col = 0; 5443 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1); 5444 } 5445 else 5446 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1); 5447 } 5448 else if ((STRNCMP(s, "class", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5])) 5449 || (STRNCMP(s, "struct", 6) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[6]))) 5450 { 5451 class_or_struct = TRUE; 5452 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE; 5453 5454 if (*s == 'c') 5455 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 5); 5456 else 5457 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 6); 5458 } 5459 else 5460 { 5461 if (s[0] == '{' || s[0] == '}' || s[0] == ';') 5462 { 5463 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE; 5464 } 5465 else if (s[0] == ')') 5466 { 5467 /* Constructor-initialization is assumed if we come across 5468 * something like "):" */ 5469 class_or_struct = FALSE; 5470 lookfor_ctor_init = TRUE; 5471 } 5472 else if (!vim_isIDc(s[0])) 5473 { 5474 /* if it is not an identifier, we are wrong */ 5475 class_or_struct = FALSE; 5476 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE; 5477 } 5478 else if (*col == 0) 5479 { 5480 /* it can't be a constructor-initialization any more */ 5481 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE; 5482 5483 /* the first statement starts here: lineup with this one... */ 5484 if (cpp_base_class && *col == 0) 5485 *col = (colnr_T)(s - line); 5486 } 5487 5488 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1); 5489 } 5490 } 5491 5492 return cpp_base_class; 5493 } 5494 5495 /* 5496 * Return TRUE if string "s" ends with the string "find", possibly followed by 5497 * white space and comments. Skip strings and comments. 5498 * Ignore "ignore" after "find" if it's not NULL. 5499 */ 5500 static int 5501 cin_ends_in(s, find, ignore) 5502 char_u *s; 5503 char_u *find; 5504 char_u *ignore; 5505 { 5506 char_u *p = s; 5507 char_u *r; 5508 int len = (int)STRLEN(find); 5509 5510 while (*p != NUL) 5511 { 5512 p = cin_skipcomment(p); 5513 if (STRNCMP(p, find, len) == 0) 5514 { 5515 r = skipwhite(p + len); 5516 if (ignore != NULL && STRNCMP(r, ignore, STRLEN(ignore)) == 0) 5517 r = skipwhite(r + STRLEN(ignore)); 5518 if (cin_nocode(r)) 5519 return TRUE; 5520 } 5521 if (*p != NUL) 5522 ++p; 5523 } 5524 return FALSE; 5525 } 5526 5527 /* 5528 * Skip strings, chars and comments until at or past "trypos". 5529 * Return the column found. 5530 */ 5531 static int 5532 cin_skip2pos(trypos) 5533 pos_T *trypos; 5534 { 5535 char_u *line; 5536 char_u *p; 5537 5538 p = line = ml_get(trypos->lnum); 5539 while (*p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < trypos->col) 5540 { 5541 if (cin_iscomment(p)) 5542 p = cin_skipcomment(p); 5543 else 5544 { 5545 p = skip_string(p); 5546 ++p; 5547 } 5548 } 5549 return (int)(p - line); 5550 } 5551 5552 /* 5553 * Find the '{' at the start of the block we are in. 5554 * Return NULL if no match found. 5555 * Ignore a '{' that is in a comment, makes indenting the next three lines 5556 * work. */ 5557 /* foo() */ 5558 /* { */ 5559 /* } */ 5560 5561 static pos_T * 5562 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */ 5563 int ind_maxcomment; 5564 { 5565 pos_T cursor_save; 5566 pos_T *trypos; 5567 pos_T *pos; 5568 static pos_T pos_copy; 5569 5570 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 5571 while ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '{', FM_BLOCKSTOP, 0)) != NULL) 5572 { 5573 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy pos_T, next findmatch will change it */ 5574 trypos = &pos_copy; 5575 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos; 5576 pos = NULL; 5577 /* ignore the { if it's in a // comment */ 5578 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) == trypos->col 5579 && (pos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) /* XXX */ 5580 break; 5581 if (pos != NULL) 5582 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 5583 } 5584 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 5585 return trypos; 5586 } 5587 5588 /* 5589 * Find the matching '(', failing if it is in a comment. 5590 * Return NULL of no match found. 5591 */ 5592 static pos_T * 5593 find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */ 5594 int ind_maxparen; 5595 int ind_maxcomment; 5596 { 5597 pos_T cursor_save; 5598 pos_T *trypos; 5599 static pos_T pos_copy; 5600 5601 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 5602 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '(', 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL) 5603 { 5604 /* check if the ( is in a // comment */ 5605 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) > trypos->col) 5606 trypos = NULL; 5607 else 5608 { 5609 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy trypos, findmatch will change it */ 5610 trypos = &pos_copy; 5611 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos; 5612 if (find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) != NULL) /* XXX */ 5613 trypos = NULL; 5614 } 5615 } 5616 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 5617 return trypos; 5618 } 5619 5620 /* 5621 * Return ind_maxparen corrected for the difference in line number between the 5622 * cursor position and "startpos". This makes sure that searching for a 5623 * matching paren above the cursor line doesn't find a match because of 5624 * looking a few lines further. 5625 */ 5626 static int 5627 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, startpos) 5628 int ind_maxparen; 5629 pos_T *startpos; 5630 { 5631 long n = (long)startpos->lnum - (long)curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 5632 5633 if (n > 0 && n < ind_maxparen / 2) 5634 return ind_maxparen - (int)n; 5635 return ind_maxparen; 5636 } 5637 5638 /* 5639 * Set w_cursor.col to the column number of the last unmatched ')' or '{' in 5640 * line "l". 5641 */ 5642 static int 5643 find_last_paren(l, start, end) 5644 char_u *l; 5645 int start, end; 5646 { 5647 int i; 5648 int retval = FALSE; 5649 int open_count = 0; 5650 5651 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; /* default is start of line */ 5652 5653 for (i = 0; l[i]; i++) 5654 { 5655 i = (int)(cin_skipcomment(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in comments */ 5656 i = (int)(skip_string(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in quotes */ 5657 if (l[i] == start) 5658 ++open_count; 5659 else if (l[i] == end) 5660 { 5661 if (open_count > 0) 5662 --open_count; 5663 else 5664 { 5665 curwin->w_cursor.col = i; 5666 retval = TRUE; 5667 } 5668 } 5669 } 5670 return retval; 5671 } 5672 5673 int 5674 get_c_indent() 5675 { 5676 /* 5677 * spaces from a block's opening brace the prevailing indent for that 5678 * block should be 5679 */ 5680 int ind_level = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5681 5682 /* 5683 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace that's at the end of a 5684 * line is imagined to be. 5685 */ 5686 int ind_open_imag = 0; 5687 5688 /* 5689 * spaces from the prevailing indent for a line that is not precededof by 5690 * an opening brace. 5691 */ 5692 int ind_no_brace = 0; 5693 5694 /* 5695 * column where the first { of a function should be located } 5696 */ 5697 int ind_first_open = 0; 5698 5699 /* 5700 * spaces from the prevailing indent a leftmost open brace should be 5701 * located 5702 */ 5703 int ind_open_extra = 0; 5704 5705 /* 5706 * spaces from the matching open brace (real location for one at the left 5707 * edge; imaginary location from one that ends a line) the matching close 5708 * brace should be located 5709 */ 5710 int ind_close_extra = 0; 5711 5712 /* 5713 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace sitting in the leftmost 5714 * column is imagined to be 5715 */ 5716 int ind_open_left_imag = 0; 5717 5718 /* 5719 * spaces from the switch() indent a "case xx" label should be located 5720 */ 5721 int ind_case = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5722 5723 /* 5724 * spaces from the "case xx:" code after a switch() should be located 5725 */ 5726 int ind_case_code = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5727 5728 /* 5729 * lineup break at end of case in switch() with case label 5730 */ 5731 int ind_case_break = 0; 5732 5733 /* 5734 * spaces from the class declaration indent a scope declaration label 5735 * should be located 5736 */ 5737 int ind_scopedecl = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5738 5739 /* 5740 * spaces from the scope declaration label code should be located 5741 */ 5742 int ind_scopedecl_code = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5743 5744 /* 5745 * amount K&R-style parameters should be indented 5746 */ 5747 int ind_param = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5748 5749 /* 5750 * amount a function type spec should be indented 5751 */ 5752 int ind_func_type = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5753 5754 /* 5755 * amount a cpp base class declaration or constructor initialization 5756 * should be indented 5757 */ 5758 int ind_cpp_baseclass = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5759 5760 /* 5761 * additional spaces beyond the prevailing indent a continuation line 5762 * should be located 5763 */ 5764 int ind_continuation = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5765 5766 /* 5767 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses 5768 */ 5769 int ind_unclosed = curbuf->b_p_sw * 2; 5770 5771 /* 5772 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses, which 5773 * itself is also unclosed 5774 */ 5775 int ind_unclosed2 = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5776 5777 /* 5778 * suppress ignoring spaces from the indent of a line starting with an 5779 * unclosed parentheses. 5780 */ 5781 int ind_unclosed_noignore = 0; 5782 5783 /* 5784 * If the opening paren is the last nonwhite character on the line, and 5785 * ind_unclosed_wrapped is nonzero, use this indent relative to the outer 5786 * context (for very long lines). 5787 */ 5788 int ind_unclosed_wrapped = 0; 5789 5790 /* 5791 * suppress ignoring white space when lining up with the character after 5792 * an unclosed parentheses. 5793 */ 5794 int ind_unclosed_whiteok = 0; 5795 5796 /* 5797 * indent a closing parentheses under the line start of the matching 5798 * opening parentheses. 5799 */ 5800 int ind_matching_paren = 0; 5801 5802 /* 5803 * Extra indent for comments. 5804 */ 5805 int ind_comment = 0; 5806 5807 /* 5808 * spaces from the comment opener when there is nothing after it. 5809 */ 5810 int ind_in_comment = 3; 5811 5812 /* 5813 * boolean: if non-zero, use ind_in_comment even if there is something 5814 * after the comment opener. 5815 */ 5816 int ind_in_comment2 = 0; 5817 5818 /* 5819 * max lines to search for an open paren 5820 */ 5821 int ind_maxparen = 20; 5822 5823 /* 5824 * max lines to search for an open comment 5825 */ 5826 int ind_maxcomment = 70; 5827 5828 /* 5829 * handle braces for java code 5830 */ 5831 int ind_java = 0; 5832 5833 /* 5834 * handle blocked cases correctly 5835 */ 5836 int ind_keep_case_label = 0; 5837 5838 pos_T cur_curpos; 5839 int amount; 5840 int scope_amount; 5841 int cur_amount; 5842 colnr_T col; 5843 char_u *theline; 5844 char_u *linecopy; 5845 pos_T *trypos; 5846 pos_T *tryposBrace = NULL; 5847 pos_T our_paren_pos; 5848 char_u *start; 5849 int start_brace; 5850 #define BRACE_IN_COL0 1 /* '{' is in comumn 0 */ 5851 #define BRACE_AT_START 2 /* '{' is at start of line */ 5852 #define BRACE_AT_END 3 /* '{' is at end of line */ 5853 linenr_T ourscope; 5854 char_u *l; 5855 char_u *look; 5856 char_u terminated; 5857 int lookfor; 5858 #define LOOKFOR_INITIAL 0 5859 #define LOOKFOR_IF 1 5860 #define LOOKFOR_DO 2 5861 #define LOOKFOR_CASE 3 5862 #define LOOKFOR_ANY 4 5863 #define LOOKFOR_TERM 5 5864 #define LOOKFOR_UNTERM 6 5865 #define LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL 7 5866 #define LOOKFOR_NOBREAK 8 5867 #define LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS 9 5868 #define LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT 10 5869 5870 int whilelevel; 5871 linenr_T lnum; 5872 char_u *options; 5873 int fraction = 0; /* init for GCC */ 5874 int divider; 5875 int n; 5876 int iscase; 5877 int lookfor_break; 5878 int cont_amount = 0; /* amount for continuation line */ 5879 5880 for (options = curbuf->b_p_cino; *options; ) 5881 { 5882 l = options++; 5883 if (*options == '-') 5884 ++options; 5885 n = getdigits(&options); 5886 divider = 0; 5887 if (*options == '.') /* ".5s" means a fraction */ 5888 { 5889 fraction = atol((char *)++options); 5890 while (VIM_ISDIGIT(*options)) 5891 { 5892 ++options; 5893 if (divider) 5894 divider *= 10; 5895 else 5896 divider = 10; 5897 } 5898 } 5899 if (*options == 's') /* "2s" means two times 'shiftwidth' */ 5900 { 5901 if (n == 0 && fraction == 0) 5902 n = curbuf->b_p_sw; /* just "s" is one 'shiftwidth' */ 5903 else 5904 { 5905 n *= curbuf->b_p_sw; 5906 if (divider) 5907 n += (curbuf->b_p_sw * fraction + divider / 2) / divider; 5908 } 5909 ++options; 5910 } 5911 if (l[1] == '-') 5912 n = -n; 5913 /* When adding an entry here, also update the default 'cinoptions' in 5914 * change.txt, and add explanation for it! */ 5915 switch (*l) 5916 { 5917 case '>': ind_level = n; break; 5918 case 'e': ind_open_imag = n; break; 5919 case 'n': ind_no_brace = n; break; 5920 case 'f': ind_first_open = n; break; 5921 case '{': ind_open_extra = n; break; 5922 case '}': ind_close_extra = n; break; 5923 case '^': ind_open_left_imag = n; break; 5924 case ':': ind_case = n; break; 5925 case '=': ind_case_code = n; break; 5926 case 'b': ind_case_break = n; break; 5927 case 'p': ind_param = n; break; 5928 case 't': ind_func_type = n; break; 5929 case '/': ind_comment = n; break; 5930 case 'c': ind_in_comment = n; break; 5931 case 'C': ind_in_comment2 = n; break; 5932 case 'i': ind_cpp_baseclass = n; break; 5933 case '+': ind_continuation = n; break; 5934 case '(': ind_unclosed = n; break; 5935 case 'u': ind_unclosed2 = n; break; 5936 case 'U': ind_unclosed_noignore = n; break; 5937 case 'W': ind_unclosed_wrapped = n; break; 5938 case 'w': ind_unclosed_whiteok = n; break; 5939 case 'm': ind_matching_paren = n; break; 5940 case ')': ind_maxparen = n; break; 5941 case '*': ind_maxcomment = n; break; 5942 case 'g': ind_scopedecl = n; break; 5943 case 'h': ind_scopedecl_code = n; break; 5944 case 'j': ind_java = n; break; 5945 case 'l': ind_keep_case_label = n; break; 5946 } 5947 } 5948 5949 /* remember where the cursor was when we started */ 5950 cur_curpos = curwin->w_cursor; 5951 5952 /* Get a copy of the current contents of the line. 5953 * This is required, because only the most recent line obtained with 5954 * ml_get is valid! */ 5955 linecopy = vim_strsave(ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum)); 5956 if (linecopy == NULL) 5957 return 0; 5958 5959 /* 5960 * In insert mode and the cursor is on a ')' truncate the line at the 5961 * cursor position. We don't want to line up with the matching '(' when 5962 * inserting new stuff. 5963 * For unknown reasons the cursor might be past the end of the line, thus 5964 * check for that. 5965 */ 5966 if ((State & INSERT) 5967 && curwin->w_cursor.col < STRLEN(linecopy) 5968 && linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] == ')') 5969 linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL; 5970 5971 theline = skipwhite(linecopy); 5972 5973 /* move the cursor to the start of the line */ 5974 5975 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 5976 5977 /* 5978 * #defines and so on always go at the left when included in 'cinkeys'. 5979 */ 5980 if (*theline == '#' && (*linecopy == '#' || in_cinkeys('#', ' ', TRUE))) 5981 { 5982 amount = 0; 5983 } 5984 5985 /* 5986 * Is it a non-case label? Then that goes at the left margin too. 5987 */ 5988 else if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)) /* XXX */ 5989 { 5990 amount = 0; 5991 } 5992 5993 /* 5994 * If we're inside a "//" comment and there is a "//" comment in a 5995 * previous line, lineup with that one. 5996 */ 5997 else if (cin_islinecomment(theline) 5998 && (trypos = find_line_comment()) != NULL) /* XXX */ 5999 { 6000 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */ 6001 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL); 6002 amount = col; 6003 } 6004 6005 /* 6006 * If we're inside a comment and not looking at the start of the 6007 * comment, try using the 'comments' option. 6008 */ 6009 else if (!cin_iscomment(theline) 6010 && (trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */ 6011 { 6012 int lead_start_len = 2; 6013 int lead_middle_len = 1; 6014 char_u lead_start[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* start-comment string */ 6015 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */ 6016 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */ 6017 char_u *p; 6018 int start_align = 0; 6019 int start_off = 0; 6020 int done = FALSE; 6021 6022 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */ 6023 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL); 6024 amount = col; 6025 6026 p = curbuf->b_p_com; 6027 while (*p != NUL) 6028 { 6029 int align = 0; 6030 int off = 0; 6031 int what = 0; 6032 6033 while (*p != NUL && *p != ':') 6034 { 6035 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_END || *p == COM_MIDDLE) 6036 what = *p++; 6037 else if (*p == COM_LEFT || *p == COM_RIGHT) 6038 align = *p++; 6039 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-') 6040 off = getdigits(&p); 6041 else 6042 ++p; 6043 } 6044 6045 if (*p == ':') 6046 ++p; 6047 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 6048 if (what == COM_START) 6049 { 6050 STRCPY(lead_start, lead_end); 6051 lead_start_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_start); 6052 start_off = off; 6053 start_align = align; 6054 } 6055 else if (what == COM_MIDDLE) 6056 { 6057 STRCPY(lead_middle, lead_end); 6058 lead_middle_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle); 6059 } 6060 else if (what == COM_END) 6061 { 6062 /* If our line starts with the middle comment string, line it 6063 * up with the comment opener per the 'comments' option. */ 6064 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) == 0 6065 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) != 0) 6066 { 6067 done = TRUE; 6068 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 6069 { 6070 /* If the start comment string matches in the previous 6071 * line, use the indent of that line pluss offset. If 6072 * the middle comment string matches in the previous 6073 * line, use the indent of that line. XXX */ 6074 look = skipwhite(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1)); 6075 if (STRNCMP(look, lead_start, lead_start_len) == 0) 6076 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 6077 else if (STRNCMP(look, lead_middle, 6078 lead_middle_len) == 0) 6079 { 6080 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 6081 break; 6082 } 6083 /* If the start comment string doesn't match with the 6084 * start of the comment, skip this entry. XXX */ 6085 else if (STRNCMP(ml_get(trypos->lnum) + trypos->col, 6086 lead_start, lead_start_len) != 0) 6087 continue; 6088 } 6089 if (start_off != 0) 6090 amount += start_off; 6091 else if (start_align == COM_RIGHT) 6092 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start) 6093 - vim_strsize(lead_middle); 6094 break; 6095 } 6096 6097 /* If our line starts with the end comment string, line it up 6098 * with the middle comment */ 6099 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) != 0 6100 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) == 0) 6101 { 6102 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 6103 /* XXX */ 6104 if (off != 0) 6105 amount += off; 6106 else if (align == COM_RIGHT) 6107 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start) 6108 - vim_strsize(lead_middle); 6109 done = TRUE; 6110 break; 6111 } 6112 } 6113 } 6114 6115 /* If our line starts with an asterisk, line up with the 6116 * asterisk in the comment opener; otherwise, line up 6117 * with the first character of the comment text. 6118 */ 6119 if (done) 6120 ; 6121 else if (theline[0] == '*') 6122 amount += 1; 6123 else 6124 { 6125 /* 6126 * If we are more than one line away from the comment opener, take 6127 * the indent of the previous non-empty line. If 'cino' has "CO" 6128 * and we are just below the comment opener and there are any 6129 * white characters after it line up with the text after it; 6130 * otherwise, add the amount specified by "c" in 'cino' 6131 */ 6132 amount = -1; 6133 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > trypos->lnum; --lnum) 6134 { 6135 if (linewhite(lnum)) /* skip blank lines */ 6136 continue; 6137 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */ 6138 break; 6139 } 6140 if (amount == -1) /* use the comment opener */ 6141 { 6142 if (!ind_in_comment2) 6143 { 6144 start = ml_get(trypos->lnum); 6145 look = start + trypos->col + 2; /* skip / and * */ 6146 if (*look != NUL) /* if something after it */ 6147 trypos->col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(look) - start); 6148 } 6149 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL); 6150 amount = col; 6151 if (ind_in_comment2 || *look == NUL) 6152 amount += ind_in_comment; 6153 } 6154 } 6155 } 6156 6157 /* 6158 * Are we inside parentheses or braces? 6159 */ /* XXX */ 6160 else if (((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)) != NULL 6161 && ind_java == 0) 6162 || (tryposBrace = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL 6163 || trypos != NULL) 6164 { 6165 if (trypos != NULL && tryposBrace != NULL) 6166 { 6167 /* Both an unmatched '(' and '{' is found. Use the one which is 6168 * closer to the current cursor position, set the other to NULL. */ 6169 if (trypos->lnum != tryposBrace->lnum 6170 ? trypos->lnum < tryposBrace->lnum 6171 : trypos->col < tryposBrace->col) 6172 trypos = NULL; 6173 else 6174 tryposBrace = NULL; 6175 } 6176 6177 if (trypos != NULL) 6178 { 6179 /* 6180 * If the matching paren is more than one line away, use the indent of 6181 * a previous non-empty line that matches the same paren. 6182 */ 6183 amount = -1; 6184 cur_amount = MAXCOL; 6185 our_paren_pos = *trypos; 6186 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > our_paren_pos.lnum; --lnum) 6187 { 6188 l = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum)); 6189 if (cin_nocode(l)) /* skip comment lines */ 6190 continue; 6191 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &lnum)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */ 6192 continue; 6193 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum; 6194 6195 /* Skip a comment. XXX */ 6196 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6197 { 6198 lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 6199 continue; 6200 } 6201 6202 /* XXX */ 6203 if ((trypos = find_match_paren( 6204 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos), 6205 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL 6206 && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum 6207 && trypos->col == our_paren_pos.col) 6208 { 6209 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */ 6210 6211 if (theline[0] == ')') 6212 { 6213 if (our_paren_pos.lnum != lnum && cur_amount > amount) 6214 cur_amount = amount; 6215 amount = -1; 6216 } 6217 break; 6218 } 6219 } 6220 6221 /* 6222 * Line up with line where the matching paren is. XXX 6223 * If the line starts with a '(' or the indent for unclosed 6224 * parentheses is zero, line up with the unclosed parentheses. 6225 */ 6226 if (amount == -1) 6227 { 6228 amount = skip_label(our_paren_pos.lnum, &look, ind_maxcomment); 6229 if (theline[0] == ')' || ind_unclosed == 0 6230 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore && *skipwhite(look) == '(')) 6231 { 6232 /* 6233 * If we're looking at a close paren, line up right there; 6234 * otherwise, line up with the next (non-white) character. 6235 * When ind_unclosed_wrapped is set and the matching paren is 6236 * the last nonwhite character of the line, use either the 6237 * indent of the current line or the indentation of the next 6238 * outer paren and add ind_unclosed_wrapped (for very long 6239 * lines). 6240 */ 6241 if (theline[0] != ')') 6242 { 6243 cur_amount = MAXCOL; 6244 l = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum); 6245 if (ind_unclosed_wrapped 6246 && cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"(", NULL)) 6247 { 6248 /* look for opening unmatched paren, indent one level 6249 * for each additional level */ 6250 n = 1; 6251 for (col = 0; col < our_paren_pos.col; ++col) 6252 { 6253 switch (l[col]) 6254 { 6255 case '(': 6256 case '{': ++n; 6257 break; 6258 6259 case ')': 6260 case '}': if (n > 1) 6261 --n; 6262 break; 6263 } 6264 } 6265 6266 our_paren_pos.col = 0; 6267 amount += n * ind_unclosed_wrapped; 6268 } 6269 else if (ind_unclosed_whiteok) 6270 our_paren_pos.col++; 6271 else 6272 { 6273 col = our_paren_pos.col + 1; 6274 while (vim_iswhite(l[col])) 6275 col++; 6276 if (l[col] != NUL) /* In case of trailing space */ 6277 our_paren_pos.col = col; 6278 else 6279 our_paren_pos.col++; 6280 } 6281 } 6282 6283 /* 6284 * Find how indented the paren is, or the character after it 6285 * if we did the above "if". 6286 */ 6287 if (our_paren_pos.col > 0) 6288 { 6289 getvcol(curwin, &our_paren_pos, &col, NULL, NULL); 6290 if (cur_amount > (int)col) 6291 cur_amount = col; 6292 } 6293 } 6294 6295 if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_matching_paren) 6296 { 6297 /* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */ 6298 } 6299 else if (ind_unclosed == 0 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore 6300 && *skipwhite(look) == '(')) 6301 { 6302 if (cur_amount != MAXCOL) 6303 amount = cur_amount; 6304 } 6305 else 6306 { 6307 /* add ind_unclosed2 for each '(' before our matching one */ 6308 col = our_paren_pos.col; 6309 while (our_paren_pos.col > 0) 6310 { 6311 --our_paren_pos.col; 6312 switch (*ml_get_pos(&our_paren_pos)) 6313 { 6314 case '(': amount += ind_unclosed2; 6315 col = our_paren_pos.col; 6316 break; 6317 case ')': amount -= ind_unclosed2; 6318 col = MAXCOL; 6319 break; 6320 } 6321 } 6322 6323 /* Use ind_unclosed once, when the first '(' is not inside 6324 * braces */ 6325 if (col == MAXCOL) 6326 amount += ind_unclosed; 6327 else 6328 { 6329 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum; 6330 curwin->w_cursor.col = col; 6331 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 6332 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6333 amount += ind_unclosed2; 6334 else 6335 amount += ind_unclosed; 6336 } 6337 /* 6338 * For a line starting with ')' use the minimum of the two 6339 * positions, to avoid giving it more indent than the previous 6340 * lines: 6341 * func_long_name( if (x 6342 * arg && yy 6343 * ) ^ not here ) ^ not here 6344 */ 6345 if (cur_amount < amount) 6346 amount = cur_amount; 6347 } 6348 } 6349 6350 /* add extra indent for a comment */ 6351 if (cin_iscomment(theline)) 6352 amount += ind_comment; 6353 } 6354 6355 /* 6356 * Are we at least inside braces, then? 6357 */ 6358 else 6359 { 6360 trypos = tryposBrace; 6361 6362 ourscope = trypos->lnum; 6363 start = ml_get(ourscope); 6364 6365 /* 6366 * Now figure out how indented the line is in general. 6367 * If the brace was at the start of the line, we use that; 6368 * otherwise, check out the indentation of the line as 6369 * a whole and then add the "imaginary indent" to that. 6370 */ 6371 look = skipwhite(start); 6372 if (*look == '{') 6373 { 6374 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL); 6375 amount = col; 6376 if (*start == '{') 6377 start_brace = BRACE_IN_COL0; 6378 else 6379 start_brace = BRACE_AT_START; 6380 } 6381 else 6382 { 6383 /* 6384 * that opening brace might have been on a continuation 6385 * line. if so, find the start of the line. 6386 */ 6387 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = ourscope; 6388 6389 /* 6390 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that 6391 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line. 6392 */ 6393 lnum = ourscope; 6394 if (find_last_paren(start, '(', ')') 6395 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 6396 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6397 lnum = trypos->lnum; 6398 6399 /* 6400 * It could have been something like 6401 * case 1: if (asdf && 6402 * ldfd) { 6403 * } 6404 */ 6405 if (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(skipwhite(ml_get_curline()))) 6406 amount = get_indent(); 6407 else 6408 amount = skip_label(lnum, &l, ind_maxcomment); 6409 6410 start_brace = BRACE_AT_END; 6411 } 6412 6413 /* 6414 * if we're looking at a closing brace, that's where 6415 * we want to be. otherwise, add the amount of room 6416 * that an indent is supposed to be. 6417 */ 6418 if (theline[0] == '}') 6419 { 6420 /* 6421 * they may want closing braces to line up with something 6422 * other than the open brace. indulge them, if so. 6423 */ 6424 amount += ind_close_extra; 6425 } 6426 else 6427 { 6428 /* 6429 * If we're looking at an "else", try to find an "if" 6430 * to match it with. 6431 * If we're looking at a "while", try to find a "do" 6432 * to match it with. 6433 */ 6434 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL; 6435 if (cin_iselse(theline)) 6436 lookfor = LOOKFOR_IF; 6437 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(theline, cur_curpos.lnum, ind_maxparen)) 6438 /* XXX */ 6439 lookfor = LOOKFOR_DO; 6440 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_INITIAL) 6441 { 6442 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = cur_curpos.lnum; 6443 if (find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, 6444 ind_maxcomment) == OK) 6445 { 6446 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 6447 goto theend; 6448 } 6449 } 6450 6451 /* 6452 * We get here if we are not on an "while-of-do" or "else" (or 6453 * failed to find a matching "if"). 6454 * Search backwards for something to line up with. 6455 * First set amount for when we don't find anything. 6456 */ 6457 6458 /* 6459 * if the '{' is _really_ at the left margin, use the imaginary 6460 * location of a left-margin brace. Otherwise, correct the 6461 * location for ind_open_extra. 6462 */ 6463 6464 if (start_brace == BRACE_IN_COL0) /* '{' is in column 0 */ 6465 { 6466 amount = ind_open_left_imag; 6467 } 6468 else 6469 { 6470 if (start_brace == BRACE_AT_END) /* '{' is at end of line */ 6471 amount += ind_open_imag; 6472 else 6473 { 6474 /* Compensate for adding ind_open_extra later. */ 6475 amount -= ind_open_extra; 6476 if (amount < 0) 6477 amount = 0; 6478 } 6479 } 6480 6481 lookfor_break = FALSE; 6482 6483 if (cin_iscase(theline)) /* it's a switch() label */ 6484 { 6485 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CASE; /* find a previous switch() label */ 6486 amount += ind_case; 6487 } 6488 else if (cin_isscopedecl(theline)) /* private:, ... */ 6489 { 6490 lookfor = LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL; /* class decl is this block */ 6491 amount += ind_scopedecl; 6492 } 6493 else 6494 { 6495 if (ind_case_break && cin_isbreak(theline)) /* break; ... */ 6496 lookfor_break = TRUE; 6497 6498 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL; 6499 amount += ind_level; /* ind_level from start of block */ 6500 } 6501 scope_amount = amount; 6502 whilelevel = 0; 6503 6504 /* 6505 * Search backwards. If we find something we recognize, line up 6506 * with that. 6507 * 6508 * if we're looking at an open brace, indent 6509 * the usual amount relative to the conditional 6510 * that opens the block. 6511 */ 6512 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos; 6513 for (;;) 6514 { 6515 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--; 6516 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 6517 6518 /* 6519 * If we went all the way back to the start of our scope, line 6520 * up with it. 6521 */ 6522 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum <= ourscope) 6523 { 6524 /* we reached end of scope: 6525 * if looking for a enum or structure initialization 6526 * go further back: 6527 * if it is an initializer (enum xxx or xxx =), then 6528 * don't add ind_continuation, otherwise it is a variable 6529 * declaration: 6530 * int x, 6531 * here; <-- add ind_continuation 6532 */ 6533 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 6534 { 6535 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == 0 6536 || curwin->w_cursor.lnum 6537 < ourscope - ind_maxparen) 6538 { 6539 /* nothing found (abuse ind_maxparen as limit) 6540 * assume terminated line (i.e. a variable 6541 * initialization) */ 6542 if (cont_amount > 0) 6543 amount = cont_amount; 6544 else 6545 amount += ind_continuation; 6546 break; 6547 } 6548 6549 l = ml_get_curline(); 6550 6551 /* 6552 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the 6553 * comment. 6554 */ 6555 trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment); 6556 if (trypos != NULL) 6557 { 6558 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 6559 continue; 6560 } 6561 6562 /* 6563 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines. 6564 */ 6565 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 6566 continue; 6567 6568 if (cin_nocode(l)) 6569 continue; 6570 6571 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE); 6572 6573 /* 6574 * If we are at top level and the line looks like a 6575 * function declaration, we are done 6576 * (it's a variable declaration). 6577 */ 6578 if (start_brace != BRACE_IN_COL0 6579 || !cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 6580 { 6581 /* if the line is terminated with another ',' 6582 * it is a continued variable initialization. 6583 * don't add extra indent. 6584 * TODO: does not work, if a function 6585 * declaration is split over multiple lines: 6586 * cin_isfuncdecl returns FALSE then. 6587 */ 6588 if (terminated == ',') 6589 break; 6590 6591 /* if it es a enum declaration or an assignment, 6592 * we are done. 6593 */ 6594 if (terminated != ';' && cin_isinit()) 6595 break; 6596 6597 /* nothing useful found */ 6598 if (terminated == 0 || terminated == '{') 6599 continue; 6600 } 6601 6602 if (terminated != ';') 6603 { 6604 /* Skip parens and braces. Position the cursor 6605 * over the rightmost paren, so that matching it 6606 * will take us back to the start of the line. 6607 */ /* XXX */ 6608 trypos = NULL; 6609 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')) 6610 trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 6611 ind_maxcomment); 6612 6613 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}')) 6614 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment); 6615 6616 if (trypos != NULL) 6617 { 6618 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 6619 continue; 6620 } 6621 } 6622 6623 /* it's a variable declaration, add indentation 6624 * like in 6625 * int a, 6626 * b; 6627 */ 6628 if (cont_amount > 0) 6629 amount = cont_amount; 6630 else 6631 amount += ind_continuation; 6632 } 6633 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM) 6634 { 6635 if (cont_amount > 0) 6636 amount = cont_amount; 6637 else 6638 amount += ind_continuation; 6639 } 6640 else if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM 6641 && lookfor != LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS) 6642 { 6643 amount = scope_amount; 6644 if (theline[0] == '{') 6645 amount += ind_open_extra; 6646 } 6647 break; 6648 } 6649 6650 /* 6651 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment. 6652 */ /* XXX */ 6653 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6654 { 6655 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 6656 continue; 6657 } 6658 6659 l = ml_get_curline(); 6660 6661 /* 6662 * If this is a switch() label, may line up relative to that. 6663 * if this is a C++ scope declaration, do the same. 6664 */ 6665 iscase = cin_iscase(l); 6666 if (iscase || cin_isscopedecl(l)) 6667 { 6668 /* we are only looking for cpp base class 6669 * declaration/initialization any longer */ 6670 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS) 6671 break; 6672 6673 /* When looking for a "do" we are not interested in 6674 * labels. */ 6675 if (whilelevel > 0) 6676 continue; 6677 6678 /* 6679 * case xx: 6680 * c = 99 + <- this indent plus continuation 6681 *-> here; 6682 */ 6683 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM 6684 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 6685 { 6686 if (cont_amount > 0) 6687 amount = cont_amount; 6688 else 6689 amount += ind_continuation; 6690 break; 6691 } 6692 6693 /* 6694 * case xx: <- line up with this case 6695 * x = 333; 6696 * case yy: 6697 */ 6698 if ( (iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE) 6699 || (iscase && lookfor_break) 6700 || (!iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL)) 6701 { 6702 /* 6703 * Check that this case label is not for another 6704 * switch() 6705 */ /* XXX */ 6706 if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) == 6707 NULL || trypos->lnum == ourscope) 6708 { 6709 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 6710 break; 6711 } 6712 continue; 6713 } 6714 6715 n = get_indent_nolabel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum); /* XXX */ 6716 6717 /* 6718 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if 6719 * y = y + 1; 6720 * -> s = 99; 6721 * 6722 * case xx: 6723 * if (cond) <- line up with this line 6724 * y = y + 1; 6725 * -> s = 99; 6726 */ 6727 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM) 6728 { 6729 if (n) 6730 amount = n; 6731 6732 if (!lookfor_break) 6733 break; 6734 } 6735 6736 /* 6737 * case xx: x = x + 1; <- line up with this x 6738 * -> y = y + 1; 6739 * 6740 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if 6741 * -> y = y + 1; 6742 */ 6743 if (n) 6744 { 6745 amount = n; 6746 l = after_label(ml_get_curline()); 6747 if (l != NULL && cin_is_cinword(l)) 6748 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace; 6749 break; 6750 } 6751 6752 /* 6753 * Try to get the indent of a statement before the switch 6754 * label. If nothing is found, line up relative to the 6755 * switch label. 6756 * break; <- may line up with this line 6757 * case xx: 6758 * -> y = 1; 6759 */ 6760 scope_amount = get_indent() + (iscase /* XXX */ 6761 ? ind_case_code : ind_scopedecl_code); 6762 lookfor = ind_case_break ? LOOKFOR_NOBREAK : LOOKFOR_ANY; 6763 continue; 6764 } 6765 6766 /* 6767 * Looking for a switch() label or C++ scope declaration, 6768 * ignore other lines, skip {}-blocks. 6769 */ 6770 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE || lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL) 6771 { 6772 if (find_last_paren(l, '{', '}') && (trypos = 6773 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6774 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 6775 continue; 6776 } 6777 6778 /* 6779 * Ignore jump labels with nothing after them. 6780 */ 6781 if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)) 6782 { 6783 l = after_label(ml_get_curline()); 6784 if (l == NULL || cin_nocode(l)) 6785 continue; 6786 } 6787 6788 /* 6789 * Ignore #defines, #if, etc. 6790 * Ignore comment and empty lines. 6791 * (need to get the line again, cin_islabel() may have 6792 * unlocked it) 6793 */ 6794 l = ml_get_curline(); 6795 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum) 6796 || cin_nocode(l)) 6797 continue; 6798 6799 /* 6800 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or 6801 * constructor initialization? 6802 */ /* XXX */ 6803 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM && ind_cpp_baseclass 6804 && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col)) 6805 { 6806 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM) 6807 { 6808 if (cont_amount > 0) 6809 amount = cont_amount; 6810 else 6811 amount += ind_continuation; 6812 } 6813 else if (col == 0 || theline[0] == '{') 6814 { 6815 amount = get_indent(); 6816 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')') 6817 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 6818 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6819 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum); /* XXX */ 6820 if (theline[0] != '{') 6821 amount += ind_cpp_baseclass; 6822 } 6823 else 6824 { 6825 curwin->w_cursor.col = col; 6826 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL); 6827 amount = (int)col; 6828 } 6829 break; 6830 } 6831 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS) 6832 { 6833 /* only look, whether there is a cpp base class 6834 * declaration or initialization before the opening brace. */ 6835 if (cin_isterminated(l, TRUE, FALSE)) 6836 break; 6837 else 6838 continue; 6839 } 6840 6841 /* 6842 * What happens next depends on the line being terminated. 6843 * If terminated with a ',' only consider it terminating if 6844 * there is anoter unterminated statement behind, eg: 6845 * 123, 6846 * sizeof 6847 * here 6848 * Otherwise check whether it is a enumeration or structure 6849 * initialisation (not indented) or a variable declaration 6850 * (indented). 6851 */ 6852 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE); 6853 6854 if (terminated == 0 || (lookfor != LOOKFOR_UNTERM 6855 && terminated == ',')) 6856 { 6857 /* 6858 * if we're in the middle of a paren thing, 6859 * go back to the line that starts it so 6860 * we can get the right prevailing indent 6861 * if ( foo && 6862 * bar ) 6863 */ 6864 /* 6865 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that 6866 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line. 6867 */ 6868 (void)find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'); 6869 trypos = find_match_paren( 6870 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos), 6871 ind_maxcomment); 6872 6873 /* 6874 * If we are looking for ',', we also look for matching 6875 * braces. 6876 */ 6877 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}')) 6878 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment); 6879 6880 if (trypos != NULL) 6881 { 6882 /* 6883 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is 6884 * handled above. 6885 * case xx: if ( asdf && 6886 * asdf) 6887 */ 6888 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum; 6889 l = ml_get_curline(); 6890 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l)) 6891 { 6892 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 6893 continue; 6894 } 6895 } 6896 6897 /* 6898 * Skip over continuation lines to find the one to get the 6899 * indent from 6900 * char *usethis = "bla\ 6901 * bla", 6902 * here; 6903 */ 6904 if (terminated == ',') 6905 { 6906 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 6907 { 6908 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 6909 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\') 6910 break; 6911 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 6912 } 6913 } 6914 6915 /* 6916 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line, 6917 * ignoring any jump label. XXX 6918 */ 6919 cur_amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 6920 &l, ind_maxcomment); 6921 6922 /* 6923 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, and it 6924 * starts with a '{', line it up with this line. 6925 * while (not) 6926 * -> { 6927 * } 6928 */ 6929 if (terminated != ',' && lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM 6930 && theline[0] == '{') 6931 { 6932 amount = cur_amount; 6933 /* 6934 * Only add ind_open_extra when the current line 6935 * doesn't start with a '{', which must have a match 6936 * in the same line (scope is the same). Probably: 6937 * { 1, 2 }, 6938 * -> { 3, 4 } 6939 */ 6940 if (*skipwhite(l) != '{') 6941 amount += ind_open_extra; 6942 6943 if (ind_cpp_baseclass) 6944 { 6945 /* have to look back, whether it is a cpp base 6946 * class declaration or initialization */ 6947 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS; 6948 continue; 6949 } 6950 break; 6951 } 6952 6953 /* 6954 * Check if we are after an "if", "while", etc. 6955 * Also allow " } else". 6956 */ 6957 if (cin_is_cinword(l) || cin_iselse(skipwhite(l))) 6958 { 6959 /* 6960 * Found an unterminated line after an if (), line up 6961 * with the last one. 6962 * if (cond) 6963 * 100 + 6964 * -> here; 6965 */ 6966 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM 6967 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 6968 { 6969 if (cont_amount > 0) 6970 amount = cont_amount; 6971 else 6972 amount += ind_continuation; 6973 break; 6974 } 6975 6976 /* 6977 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, we 6978 * are finished. 6979 * while (not) 6980 * -> here; 6981 * Otherwise this indent can be used when the line 6982 * before this is terminated. 6983 * yyy; 6984 * if (stat) 6985 * while (not) 6986 * xxx; 6987 * -> here; 6988 */ 6989 amount = cur_amount; 6990 if (theline[0] == '{') 6991 amount += ind_open_extra; 6992 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM) 6993 { 6994 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace; 6995 break; 6996 } 6997 6998 /* 6999 * Special trick: when expecting the while () after a 7000 * do, line up with the while() 7001 * do 7002 * x = 1; 7003 * -> here 7004 */ 7005 l = skipwhite(ml_get_curline()); 7006 if (cin_isdo(l)) 7007 { 7008 if (whilelevel == 0) 7009 break; 7010 --whilelevel; 7011 } 7012 7013 /* 7014 * When searching for a terminated line, don't use the 7015 * one between the "if" and the "else". 7016 * Need to use the scope of this "else". XXX 7017 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {". 7018 */ 7019 if (cin_iselse(l) 7020 && whilelevel == 0 7021 && ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) 7022 == NULL 7023 || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum, 7024 ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL)) 7025 break; 7026 } 7027 7028 /* 7029 * If we're below an unterminated line that is not an 7030 * "if" or something, we may line up with this line or 7031 * add someting for a continuation line, depending on 7032 * the line before this one. 7033 */ 7034 else 7035 { 7036 /* 7037 * Found two unterminated lines on a row, line up with 7038 * the last one. 7039 * c = 99 + 7040 * 100 + 7041 * -> here; 7042 */ 7043 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM) 7044 { 7045 /* When line ends in a comma add extra indent */ 7046 if (terminated == ',') 7047 amount += ind_continuation; 7048 break; 7049 } 7050 7051 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 7052 { 7053 /* Found two lines ending in ',', lineup with the 7054 * lowest one, but check for cpp base class 7055 * declaration/initialization, if it is an 7056 * opening brace or we are looking just for 7057 * enumerations/initializations. */ 7058 if (terminated == ',') 7059 { 7060 if (ind_cpp_baseclass == 0) 7061 break; 7062 7063 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS; 7064 continue; 7065 } 7066 7067 /* Ignore unterminated lines in between, but 7068 * reduce indent. */ 7069 if (amount > cur_amount) 7070 amount = cur_amount; 7071 } 7072 else 7073 { 7074 /* 7075 * Found first unterminated line on a row, may 7076 * line up with this line, remember its indent 7077 * 100 + 7078 * -> here; 7079 */ 7080 amount = cur_amount; 7081 7082 /* 7083 * If previous line ends in ',', check whether we 7084 * are in an initialization or enum 7085 * struct xxx = 7086 * { 7087 * sizeof a, 7088 * 124 }; 7089 * or a normal possible continuation line. 7090 * but only, of no other statement has been found 7091 * yet. 7092 */ 7093 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL && terminated == ',') 7094 { 7095 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT; 7096 cont_amount = cin_first_id_amount(); 7097 } 7098 else 7099 { 7100 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL 7101 && *l != NUL 7102 && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\') 7103 /* XXX */ 7104 cont_amount = cin_get_equal_amount( 7105 curwin->w_cursor.lnum); 7106 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM) 7107 lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM; 7108 } 7109 } 7110 } 7111 } 7112 7113 /* 7114 * Check if we are after a while (cond); 7115 * If so: Ignore until the matching "do". 7116 */ 7117 /* XXX */ 7118 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(l, 7119 curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen)) 7120 { 7121 /* 7122 * Found an unterminated line after a while ();, line up 7123 * with the last one. 7124 * while (cond); 7125 * 100 + <- line up with this one 7126 * -> here; 7127 */ 7128 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM 7129 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 7130 { 7131 if (cont_amount > 0) 7132 amount = cont_amount; 7133 else 7134 amount += ind_continuation; 7135 break; 7136 } 7137 7138 if (whilelevel == 0) 7139 { 7140 lookfor = LOOKFOR_TERM; 7141 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 7142 if (theline[0] == '{') 7143 amount += ind_open_extra; 7144 } 7145 ++whilelevel; 7146 } 7147 7148 /* 7149 * We are after a "normal" statement. 7150 * If we had another statement we can stop now and use the 7151 * indent of that other statement. 7152 * Otherwise the indent of the current statement may be used, 7153 * search backwards for the next "normal" statement. 7154 */ 7155 else 7156 { 7157 /* 7158 * Skip single break line, if before a switch label. It 7159 * may be lined up with the case label. 7160 */ 7161 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_NOBREAK 7162 && cin_isbreak(skipwhite(ml_get_curline()))) 7163 { 7164 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ANY; 7165 continue; 7166 } 7167 7168 /* 7169 * Handle "do {" line. 7170 */ 7171 if (whilelevel > 0) 7172 { 7173 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 7174 if (cin_isdo(l)) 7175 { 7176 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 7177 --whilelevel; 7178 continue; 7179 } 7180 } 7181 7182 /* 7183 * Found a terminated line above an unterminated line. Add 7184 * the amount for a continuation line. 7185 * x = 1; 7186 * y = foo + 7187 * -> here; 7188 * or 7189 * int x = 1; 7190 * int foo, 7191 * -> here; 7192 */ 7193 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM 7194 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 7195 { 7196 if (cont_amount > 0) 7197 amount = cont_amount; 7198 else 7199 amount += ind_continuation; 7200 break; 7201 } 7202 7203 /* 7204 * Found a terminated line above a terminated line or "if" 7205 * etc. line. Use the amount of the line below us. 7206 * x = 1; x = 1; 7207 * if (asdf) y = 2; 7208 * while (asdf) ->here; 7209 * here; 7210 * ->foo; 7211 */ 7212 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM) 7213 { 7214 if (!lookfor_break && whilelevel == 0) 7215 break; 7216 } 7217 7218 /* 7219 * First line above the one we're indenting is terminated. 7220 * To know what needs to be done look further backward for 7221 * a terminated line. 7222 */ 7223 else 7224 { 7225 /* 7226 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so 7227 * that matching it will take us back to the start of 7228 * the line. Helps for: 7229 * func(asdr, 7230 * asdfasdf); 7231 * here; 7232 */ 7233 term_again: 7234 l = ml_get_curline(); 7235 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')') 7236 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 7237 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7238 { 7239 /* 7240 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is 7241 * handled above. 7242 * case xx: if ( asdf && 7243 * asdf) 7244 */ 7245 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum; 7246 l = ml_get_curline(); 7247 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l)) 7248 { 7249 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 7250 continue; 7251 } 7252 } 7253 7254 /* When aligning with the case statement, don't align 7255 * with a statement after it. 7256 * case 1: { <-- don't use this { position 7257 * stat; 7258 * } 7259 * case 2: 7260 * stat; 7261 * } 7262 */ 7263 iscase = (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(l)); 7264 7265 /* 7266 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line, 7267 * ignoring any jump label. 7268 */ 7269 amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 7270 &l, ind_maxcomment); 7271 7272 if (theline[0] == '{') 7273 amount += ind_open_extra; 7274 /* See remark above: "Only add ind_open_extra.." */ 7275 if (*skipwhite(l) == '{') 7276 amount -= ind_open_extra; 7277 lookfor = iscase ? LOOKFOR_ANY : LOOKFOR_TERM; 7278 7279 /* 7280 * If we're at the end of a block, skip to the start of 7281 * that block. 7282 */ 7283 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7284 if (*cin_skipcomment(l) == '}' 7285 && (trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) 7286 != NULL) /* XXX */ 7287 { 7288 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum; 7289 /* if not "else {" check for terminated again */ 7290 /* but skip block for "} else {" */ 7291 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 7292 if (*l == '}' || !cin_iselse(l)) 7293 goto term_again; 7294 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 7295 } 7296 } 7297 } 7298 } 7299 } 7300 } 7301 7302 /* add extra indent for a comment */ 7303 if (cin_iscomment(theline)) 7304 amount += ind_comment; 7305 } 7306 7307 /* 7308 * ok -- we're not inside any sort of structure at all! 7309 * 7310 * this means we're at the top level, and everything should 7311 * basically just match where the previous line is, except 7312 * for the lines immediately following a function declaration, 7313 * which are K&R-style parameters and need to be indented. 7314 */ 7315 else 7316 { 7317 /* 7318 * if our line starts with an open brace, forget about any 7319 * prevailing indent and make sure it looks like the start 7320 * of a function 7321 */ 7322 7323 if (theline[0] == '{') 7324 { 7325 amount = ind_first_open; 7326 } 7327 7328 /* 7329 * If the NEXT line is a function declaration, the current 7330 * line needs to be indented as a function type spec. 7331 * Don't do this if the current line looks like a comment 7332 * or if the current line is terminated, ie. ends in ';'. 7333 */ 7334 else if (cur_curpos.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count 7335 && !cin_nocode(theline) 7336 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)":", NULL) 7337 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)",", NULL) 7338 && cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum + 1) 7339 && !cin_isterminated(theline, FALSE, TRUE)) 7340 { 7341 amount = ind_func_type; 7342 } 7343 else 7344 { 7345 amount = 0; 7346 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos; 7347 7348 /* search backwards until we find something we recognize */ 7349 7350 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 7351 { 7352 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--; 7353 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7354 7355 l = ml_get_curline(); 7356 7357 /* 7358 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment. 7359 */ /* XXX */ 7360 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7361 { 7362 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 7363 continue; 7364 } 7365 7366 /* 7367 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or constructor 7368 * initialization? 7369 */ /* XXX */ 7370 if (ind_cpp_baseclass != 0 && theline[0] != '{' 7371 && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col)) 7372 { 7373 if (col == 0) 7374 { 7375 amount = get_indent() + ind_cpp_baseclass; /* XXX */ 7376 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')') 7377 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 7378 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7379 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum) 7380 + ind_cpp_baseclass; /* XXX */ 7381 } 7382 else 7383 { 7384 curwin->w_cursor.col = col; 7385 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL); 7386 amount = (int)col; 7387 } 7388 break; 7389 } 7390 7391 /* 7392 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines. 7393 */ 7394 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 7395 continue; 7396 7397 if (cin_nocode(l)) 7398 continue; 7399 7400 /* 7401 * If the previous line ends in ',', use one level of 7402 * indentation: 7403 * int foo, 7404 * bar; 7405 * do this before checking for '}' in case of eg. 7406 * enum foobar 7407 * { 7408 * ... 7409 * } foo, 7410 * bar; 7411 */ 7412 n = 0; 7413 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL) 7414 || (*l != NUL && (n = l[STRLEN(l) - 1]) == '\\')) 7415 { 7416 /* take us back to opening paren */ 7417 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')') 7418 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 7419 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7420 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum; 7421 7422 /* For a line ending in ',' that is a continuation line go 7423 * back to the first line with a backslash: 7424 * char *foo = "bla\ 7425 * bla", 7426 * here; 7427 */ 7428 while (n == 0 && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 7429 { 7430 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 7431 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\') 7432 break; 7433 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 7434 } 7435 7436 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 7437 7438 if (amount == 0) 7439 amount = cin_first_id_amount(); 7440 if (amount == 0) 7441 amount = ind_continuation; 7442 break; 7443 } 7444 7445 /* 7446 * If the line looks like a function declaration, and we're 7447 * not in a comment, put it the left margin. 7448 */ 7449 if (cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum)) /* XXX */ 7450 break; 7451 l = ml_get_curline(); 7452 7453 /* 7454 * Finding the closing '}' of a previous function. Put 7455 * current line at the left margin. For when 'cino' has "fs". 7456 */ 7457 if (*skipwhite(l) == '}') 7458 break; 7459 7460 /* (matching {) 7461 * If the previous line ends on '};' (maybe followed by 7462 * comments) align at column 0. For example: 7463 * char *string_array[] = { "foo", 7464 * / * x * / "b};ar" }; / * foobar * / 7465 */ 7466 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"};", NULL)) 7467 break; 7468 7469 /* 7470 * If the PREVIOUS line is a function declaration, the current 7471 * line (and the ones that follow) needs to be indented as 7472 * parameters. 7473 */ 7474 if (cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 7475 { 7476 amount = ind_param; 7477 break; 7478 } 7479 7480 /* 7481 * If the previous line ends in ';' and the line before the 7482 * previous line ends in ',' or '\', ident to column zero: 7483 * int foo, 7484 * bar; 7485 * indent_to_0 here; 7486 */ 7487 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u*)";", NULL)) 7488 { 7489 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 7490 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL) 7491 || (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')) 7492 break; 7493 l = ml_get_curline(); 7494 } 7495 7496 /* 7497 * Doesn't look like anything interesting -- so just 7498 * use the indent of this line. 7499 * 7500 * Position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that 7501 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line. 7502 */ 7503 find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'); 7504 7505 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 7506 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7507 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum; 7508 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 7509 break; 7510 } 7511 7512 /* add extra indent for a comment */ 7513 if (cin_iscomment(theline)) 7514 amount += ind_comment; 7515 7516 /* add extra indent if the previous line ended in a backslash: 7517 * "asdfasdf\ 7518 * here"; 7519 * char *foo = "asdf\ 7520 * here"; 7521 */ 7522 if (cur_curpos.lnum > 1) 7523 { 7524 l = ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum - 1); 7525 if (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\') 7526 { 7527 cur_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(cur_curpos.lnum - 1); 7528 if (cur_amount > 0) 7529 amount = cur_amount; 7530 else if (cur_amount == 0) 7531 amount += ind_continuation; 7532 } 7533 } 7534 } 7535 } 7536 7537 theend: 7538 /* put the cursor back where it belongs */ 7539 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos; 7540 7541 vim_free(linecopy); 7542 7543 if (amount < 0) 7544 return 0; 7545 return amount; 7546 } 7547 7548 static int 7549 find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) 7550 int lookfor; 7551 linenr_T ourscope; 7552 int ind_maxparen; 7553 int ind_maxcomment; 7554 { 7555 char_u *look; 7556 pos_T *theirscope; 7557 char_u *mightbeif; 7558 int elselevel; 7559 int whilelevel; 7560 7561 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF) 7562 { 7563 elselevel = 1; 7564 whilelevel = 0; 7565 } 7566 else 7567 { 7568 elselevel = 0; 7569 whilelevel = 1; 7570 } 7571 7572 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7573 7574 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > ourscope + 1) 7575 { 7576 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--; 7577 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7578 7579 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 7580 if (cin_iselse(look) 7581 || cin_isif(look) 7582 || cin_isdo(look) /* XXX */ 7583 || cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen)) 7584 { 7585 /* 7586 * if we've gone outside the braces entirely, 7587 * we must be out of scope... 7588 */ 7589 theirscope = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment); /* XXX */ 7590 if (theirscope == NULL) 7591 break; 7592 7593 /* 7594 * and if the brace enclosing this is further 7595 * back than the one enclosing the else, we're 7596 * out of luck too. 7597 */ 7598 if (theirscope->lnum < ourscope) 7599 break; 7600 7601 /* 7602 * and if they're enclosed in a *deeper* brace, 7603 * then we can ignore it because it's in a 7604 * different scope... 7605 */ 7606 if (theirscope->lnum > ourscope) 7607 continue; 7608 7609 /* 7610 * if it was an "else" (that's not an "else if") 7611 * then we need to go back to another if, so 7612 * increment elselevel 7613 */ 7614 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 7615 if (cin_iselse(look)) 7616 { 7617 mightbeif = cin_skipcomment(look + 4); 7618 if (!cin_isif(mightbeif)) 7619 ++elselevel; 7620 continue; 7621 } 7622 7623 /* 7624 * if it was a "while" then we need to go back to 7625 * another "do", so increment whilelevel. XXX 7626 */ 7627 if (cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen)) 7628 { 7629 ++whilelevel; 7630 continue; 7631 } 7632 7633 /* If it's an "if" decrement elselevel */ 7634 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 7635 if (cin_isif(look)) 7636 { 7637 elselevel--; 7638 /* 7639 * When looking for an "if" ignore "while"s that 7640 * get in the way. 7641 */ 7642 if (elselevel == 0 && lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF) 7643 whilelevel = 0; 7644 } 7645 7646 /* If it's a "do" decrement whilelevel */ 7647 if (cin_isdo(look)) 7648 whilelevel--; 7649 7650 /* 7651 * if we've used up all the elses, then 7652 * this must be the if that we want! 7653 * match the indent level of that if. 7654 */ 7655 if (elselevel <= 0 && whilelevel <= 0) 7656 { 7657 return OK; 7658 } 7659 } 7660 } 7661 return FAIL; 7662 } 7663 7664 # if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO) 7665 /* 7666 * Get indent level from 'indentexpr'. 7667 */ 7668 int 7669 get_expr_indent() 7670 { 7671 int indent; 7672 pos_T pos; 7673 int save_State; 7674 7675 pos = curwin->w_cursor; 7676 set_vim_var_nr(VV_LNUM, curwin->w_cursor.lnum); 7677 ++sandbox; 7678 indent = eval_to_number(curbuf->b_p_inde); 7679 --sandbox; 7680 7681 /* Restore the cursor position so that 'indentexpr' doesn't need to. 7682 * Pretend to be in Insert mode, allow cursor past end of line for "o" 7683 * command. */ 7684 save_State = State; 7685 State = INSERT; 7686 curwin->w_cursor = pos; 7687 check_cursor(); 7688 State = save_State; 7689 7690 /* If there is an error, just keep the current indent. */ 7691 if (indent < 0) 7692 indent = get_indent(); 7693 7694 return indent; 7695 } 7696 # endif 7697 7698 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT */ 7699 7700 #if defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(PROTO) 7701 7702 static int lisp_match __ARGS((char_u *p)); 7703 7704 static int 7705 lisp_match(p) 7706 char_u *p; 7707 { 7708 char_u buf[LSIZE]; 7709 int len; 7710 char_u *word = p_lispwords; 7711 7712 while (*word != NUL) 7713 { 7714 (void)copy_option_part(&word, buf, LSIZE, ","); 7715 len = (int)STRLEN(buf); 7716 if (STRNCMP(buf, p, len) == 0 && p[len] == ' ') 7717 return TRUE; 7718 } 7719 return FALSE; 7720 } 7721 7722 /* 7723 * When 'p' is present in 'cpoptions, a Vi compatible method is used. 7724 * The incompatible newer method is quite a bit better at indenting 7725 * code in lisp-like languages than the traditional one; it's still 7726 * mostly heuristics however -- Dirk van Deun, [email protected] 7727 * 7728 * TODO: 7729 * Findmatch() should be adapted for lisp, also to make showmatch 7730 * work correctly: now (v5.3) it seems all C/C++ oriented: 7731 * - it does not recognize the #\( and #\) notations as character literals 7732 * - it doesn't know about comments starting with a semicolon 7733 * - it incorrectly interprets '(' as a character literal 7734 * All this messes up get_lisp_indent in some rare cases. 7735 * Update from Sergey Khorev: 7736 * I tried to fix the first two issues. 7737 */ 7738 int 7739 get_lisp_indent() 7740 { 7741 pos_T *pos, realpos, paren; 7742 int amount; 7743 char_u *that; 7744 colnr_T col; 7745 colnr_T firsttry; 7746 int parencount, quotecount; 7747 int vi_lisp; 7748 7749 /* Set vi_lisp to use the vi-compatible method */ 7750 vi_lisp = (vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISP) != NULL); 7751 7752 realpos = curwin->w_cursor; 7753 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7754 7755 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) == NULL) 7756 pos = findmatch(NULL, '['); 7757 else 7758 { 7759 paren = *pos; 7760 pos = findmatch(NULL, '['); 7761 if (pos == NULL || ltp(pos, &paren)) 7762 pos = &paren; 7763 } 7764 if (pos != NULL) 7765 { 7766 /* Extra trick: Take the indent of the first previous non-white 7767 * line that is at the same () level. */ 7768 amount = -1; 7769 parencount = 0; 7770 7771 while (--curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= pos->lnum) 7772 { 7773 if (linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 7774 continue; 7775 for (that = ml_get_curline(); *that != NUL; ++that) 7776 { 7777 if (*that == ';') 7778 { 7779 while (*(that + 1) != NUL) 7780 ++that; 7781 continue; 7782 } 7783 if (*that == '\\') 7784 { 7785 if (*(that + 1) != NUL) 7786 ++that; 7787 continue; 7788 } 7789 if (*that == '"' && *(that + 1) != NUL) 7790 { 7791 that++; 7792 while (*that && (*that != '"' || *(that - 1) == '\\')) 7793 ++that; 7794 } 7795 if (*that == '(' || *that == '[') 7796 ++parencount; 7797 else if (*that == ')' || *that == ']') 7798 --parencount; 7799 } 7800 if (parencount == 0) 7801 { 7802 amount = get_indent(); 7803 break; 7804 } 7805 } 7806 7807 if (amount == -1) 7808 { 7809 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 7810 curwin->w_cursor.col = pos->col; 7811 col = pos->col; 7812 7813 that = ml_get_curline(); 7814 7815 if (vi_lisp && get_indent() == 0) 7816 amount = 2; 7817 else 7818 { 7819 amount = 0; 7820 while (*that && col) 7821 { 7822 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, (colnr_T)amount); 7823 col--; 7824 } 7825 7826 /* 7827 * Some keywords require "body" indenting rules (the 7828 * non-standard-lisp ones are Scheme special forms): 7829 * 7830 * (let ((a 1)) instead (let ((a 1)) 7831 * (...)) of (...)) 7832 */ 7833 7834 if (!vi_lisp && (*that == '(' || *that == '[') 7835 && lisp_match(that + 1)) 7836 amount += 2; 7837 else 7838 { 7839 that++; 7840 amount++; 7841 firsttry = amount; 7842 7843 while (vim_iswhite(*that)) 7844 { 7845 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount); 7846 ++that; 7847 } 7848 7849 if (*that && *that != ';') /* not a comment line */ 7850 { 7851 /* test *that != '(' to accomodate first let/do 7852 * argument if it is more than one line */ 7853 if (!vi_lisp && *that != '(' && *that != '[') 7854 firsttry++; 7855 7856 parencount = 0; 7857 quotecount = 0; 7858 7859 if (vi_lisp 7860 || (*that != '"' 7861 && *that != '\'' 7862 && *that != '#' 7863 && (*that < '0' || *that > '9'))) 7864 { 7865 while (*that 7866 && (!vim_iswhite(*that) 7867 || quotecount 7868 || parencount) 7869 && (!((*that == '(' || *that == '[') 7870 && !quotecount 7871 && !parencount 7872 && vi_lisp))) 7873 { 7874 if (*that == '"') 7875 quotecount = !quotecount; 7876 if ((*that == '(' || *that == '[') 7877 && !quotecount) 7878 ++parencount; 7879 if ((*that == ')' || *that == ']') 7880 && !quotecount) 7881 --parencount; 7882 if (*that == '\\' && *(that+1) != NUL) 7883 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, 7884 (colnr_T)amount); 7885 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, 7886 (colnr_T)amount); 7887 } 7888 } 7889 while (vim_iswhite(*that)) 7890 { 7891 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount); 7892 that++; 7893 } 7894 if (!*that || *that == ';') 7895 amount = firsttry; 7896 } 7897 } 7898 } 7899 } 7900 } 7901 else 7902 amount = 0; /* no matching '(' or '[' found, use zero indent */ 7903 7904 curwin->w_cursor = realpos; 7905 7906 return amount; 7907 } 7908 #endif /* FEAT_LISP */ 7909 7910 void 7911 prepare_to_exit() 7912 { 7913 #if defined(SIGHUP) && defined(SIG_IGN) 7914 /* Ignore SIGHUP, because a dropped connection causes a read error, which 7915 * makes Vim exit and then handling SIGHUP causes various reentrance 7916 * problems. */ 7917 signal(SIGHUP, SIG_IGN); 7918 #endif 7919 7920 #ifdef FEAT_GUI 7921 if (gui.in_use) 7922 { 7923 gui.dying = TRUE; 7924 out_trash(); /* trash any pending output */ 7925 } 7926 else 7927 #endif 7928 { 7929 windgoto((int)Rows - 1, 0); 7930 7931 /* 7932 * Switch terminal mode back now, so messages end up on the "normal" 7933 * screen (if there are two screens). 7934 */ 7935 settmode(TMODE_COOK); 7936 #ifdef WIN3264 7937 if (can_end_termcap_mode(FALSE) == TRUE) 7938 #endif 7939 stoptermcap(); 7940 out_flush(); 7941 } 7942 } 7943 7944 /* 7945 * Preserve files and exit. 7946 * When called IObuff must contain a message. 7947 */ 7948 void 7949 preserve_exit() 7950 { 7951 buf_T *buf; 7952 7953 prepare_to_exit(); 7954 7955 out_str(IObuff); 7956 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */ 7957 out_flush(); 7958 7959 ml_close_notmod(); /* close all not-modified buffers */ 7960 7961 for (buf = firstbuf; buf != NULL; buf = buf->b_next) 7962 { 7963 if (buf->b_ml.ml_mfp != NULL && buf->b_ml.ml_mfp->mf_fname != NULL) 7964 { 7965 OUT_STR(_("Vim: preserving files...\n")); 7966 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */ 7967 out_flush(); 7968 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */ 7969 break; 7970 } 7971 } 7972 7973 ml_close_all(FALSE); /* close all memfiles, without deleting */ 7974 7975 OUT_STR(_("Vim: Finished.\n")); 7976 7977 getout(1); 7978 } 7979 7980 /* 7981 * return TRUE if "fname" exists. 7982 */ 7983 int 7984 vim_fexists(fname) 7985 char_u *fname; 7986 { 7987 struct stat st; 7988 7989 if (mch_stat((char *)fname, &st)) 7990 return FALSE; 7991 return TRUE; 7992 } 7993 7994 /* 7995 * Check for CTRL-C pressed, but only once in a while. 7996 * Should be used instead of ui_breakcheck() for functions that check for 7997 * each line in the file. Calling ui_breakcheck() each time takes too much 7998 * time, because it can be a system call. 7999 */ 8000 8001 #ifndef BREAKCHECK_SKIP 8002 # ifdef FEAT_GUI /* assume the GUI only runs on fast computers */ 8003 # define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 200 8004 # else 8005 # define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 32 8006 # endif 8007 #endif 8008 8009 static int breakcheck_count = 0; 8010 8011 void 8012 line_breakcheck() 8013 { 8014 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP) 8015 { 8016 breakcheck_count = 0; 8017 ui_breakcheck(); 8018 } 8019 } 8020 8021 /* 8022 * Like line_breakcheck() but check 10 times less often. 8023 */ 8024 void 8025 fast_breakcheck() 8026 { 8027 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP * 10) 8028 { 8029 breakcheck_count = 0; 8030 ui_breakcheck(); 8031 } 8032 } 8033 8034 /* 8035 * Expand wildcards. Calls gen_expand_wildcards() and removes files matching 8036 * 'wildignore'. 8037 */ 8038 int 8039 expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags) 8040 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */ 8041 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */ 8042 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */ 8043 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */ 8044 int flags; /* EW_DIR, etc. */ 8045 { 8046 int retval; 8047 int i, j; 8048 char_u *p; 8049 int non_suf_match; /* number without matching suffix */ 8050 8051 retval = gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags); 8052 8053 /* When keeping all matches, return here */ 8054 if (flags & EW_KEEPALL) 8055 return retval; 8056 8057 #ifdef FEAT_WILDIGN 8058 /* 8059 * Remove names that match 'wildignore'. 8060 */ 8061 if (*p_wig) 8062 { 8063 char_u *ffname; 8064 8065 /* check all files in (*file)[] */ 8066 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i) 8067 { 8068 ffname = FullName_save((*file)[i], FALSE); 8069 if (ffname == NULL) /* out of memory */ 8070 break; 8071 # ifdef VMS 8072 vms_remove_version(ffname); 8073 # endif 8074 if (match_file_list(p_wig, (*file)[i], ffname)) 8075 { 8076 /* remove this matching file from the list */ 8077 vim_free((*file)[i]); 8078 for (j = i; j + 1 < *num_file; ++j) 8079 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j + 1]; 8080 --*num_file; 8081 --i; 8082 } 8083 vim_free(ffname); 8084 } 8085 } 8086 #endif 8087 8088 /* 8089 * Move the names where 'suffixes' match to the end. 8090 */ 8091 if (*num_file > 1) 8092 { 8093 non_suf_match = 0; 8094 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i) 8095 { 8096 if (!match_suffix((*file)[i])) 8097 { 8098 /* 8099 * Move the name without matching suffix to the front 8100 * of the list. 8101 */ 8102 p = (*file)[i]; 8103 for (j = i; j > non_suf_match; --j) 8104 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j - 1]; 8105 (*file)[non_suf_match++] = p; 8106 } 8107 } 8108 } 8109 8110 return retval; 8111 } 8112 8113 /* 8114 * Return TRUE if "fname" matches with an entry in 'suffixes'. 8115 */ 8116 int 8117 match_suffix(fname) 8118 char_u *fname; 8119 { 8120 int fnamelen, setsuflen; 8121 char_u *setsuf; 8122 #define MAXSUFLEN 30 /* maximum length of a file suffix */ 8123 char_u suf_buf[MAXSUFLEN]; 8124 8125 fnamelen = (int)STRLEN(fname); 8126 setsuflen = 0; 8127 for (setsuf = p_su; *setsuf; ) 8128 { 8129 setsuflen = copy_option_part(&setsuf, suf_buf, MAXSUFLEN, ".,"); 8130 if (fnamelen >= setsuflen 8131 && fnamencmp(suf_buf, fname + fnamelen - setsuflen, 8132 (size_t)setsuflen) == 0) 8133 break; 8134 setsuflen = 0; 8135 } 8136 return (setsuflen != 0); 8137 } 8138 8139 #if !defined(NO_EXPANDPATH) || defined(PROTO) 8140 8141 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK 8142 static int vim_backtick __ARGS((char_u *p)); 8143 static int expand_backtick __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pat, int flags)); 8144 # endif 8145 8146 # if defined(MSDOS) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W16) || defined(WIN3264) 8147 /* 8148 * File name expansion code for MS-DOS, Win16 and Win32. It's here because 8149 * it's shared between these systems. 8150 */ 8151 # if defined(DJGPP) || defined(PROTO) 8152 # define _cdecl /* DJGPP doesn't have this */ 8153 # else 8154 # ifdef __BORLANDC__ 8155 # define _cdecl _RTLENTRYF 8156 # endif 8157 # endif 8158 8159 /* 8160 * comparison function for qsort in dos_expandpath() 8161 */ 8162 static int _cdecl 8163 pstrcmp(const void *a, const void *b) 8164 { 8165 return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1)); 8166 } 8167 8168 # ifndef WIN3264 8169 static void 8170 namelowcpy( 8171 char_u *d, 8172 char_u *s) 8173 { 8174 # ifdef DJGPP 8175 if (USE_LONG_FNAME) /* don't lower case on Windows 95/NT systems */ 8176 while (*s) 8177 *d++ = *s++; 8178 else 8179 # endif 8180 while (*s) 8181 *d++ = TOLOWER_LOC(*s++); 8182 *d = NUL; 8183 } 8184 # endif 8185 8186 /* 8187 * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or 8188 * directories. Adds matches to "gap". Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc. 8189 * Return the number of matches found. 8190 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting 8191 * at "path[wildoff]". 8192 * Return the number of matches found. 8193 * NOTE: much of this is identical to unix_expandpath(), keep in sync! 8194 */ 8195 static int 8196 dos_expandpath( 8197 garray_T *gap, 8198 char_u *path, 8199 int wildoff, 8200 int flags, /* EW_* flags */ 8201 int didstar) /* expaneded "**" once already */ 8202 { 8203 char_u *buf; 8204 char_u *path_end; 8205 char_u *p, *s, *e; 8206 int start_len = gap->ga_len; 8207 char_u *pat; 8208 regmatch_T regmatch; 8209 int starts_with_dot; 8210 int matches; 8211 int len; 8212 int starstar = FALSE; 8213 static int stardepth = 0; /* depth for "**" expansion */ 8214 #ifdef WIN3264 8215 WIN32_FIND_DATA fb; 8216 HANDLE hFind = (HANDLE)0; 8217 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8218 WIN32_FIND_DATAW wfb; 8219 WCHAR *wn = NULL; /* UCS-2 name, NULL when not used. */ 8220 # endif 8221 #else 8222 struct ffblk fb; 8223 #endif 8224 char_u *matchname; 8225 int ok; 8226 8227 /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */ 8228 if (stardepth > 0) 8229 { 8230 ui_breakcheck(); 8231 if (got_int) 8232 return 0; 8233 } 8234 8235 /* make room for file name */ 8236 buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5); 8237 if (buf == NULL) 8238 return 0; 8239 8240 /* 8241 * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard or a ~1. 8242 * Copy it into buf, including the preceding characters. 8243 */ 8244 p = buf; 8245 s = buf; 8246 e = NULL; 8247 path_end = path; 8248 while (*path_end != NUL) 8249 { 8250 /* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will 8251 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */ 8252 if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end)) 8253 *p++ = *path_end++; 8254 else if (*path_end == '\\' || *path_end == ':' || *path_end == '/') 8255 { 8256 if (e != NULL) 8257 break; 8258 s = p + 1; 8259 } 8260 else if (path_end >= path + wildoff 8261 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[~", *path_end) != NULL) 8262 e = p; 8263 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8264 if (has_mbyte) 8265 { 8266 len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end); 8267 STRNCPY(p, path_end, len); 8268 p += len; 8269 path_end += len; 8270 } 8271 else 8272 #endif 8273 *p++ = *path_end++; 8274 } 8275 e = p; 8276 *e = NUL; 8277 8278 /* now we have one wildcard component between s and e */ 8279 /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard 8280 * component. */ 8281 for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p) 8282 if (rem_backslash(p)) 8283 { 8284 STRCPY(p, p + 1); 8285 --e; 8286 --s; 8287 } 8288 8289 /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */ 8290 for (p = s; p < e; ++p) 8291 if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*') 8292 starstar = TRUE; 8293 8294 starts_with_dot = (*s == '.'); 8295 pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE); 8296 if (pat == NULL) 8297 { 8298 vim_free(buf); 8299 return 0; 8300 } 8301 8302 /* compile the regexp into a program */ 8303 regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE; /* Always ignore case */ 8304 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC); 8305 vim_free(pat); 8306 8307 if (regmatch.regprog == NULL) 8308 { 8309 vim_free(buf); 8310 return 0; 8311 } 8312 8313 /* remember the pattern or file name being looked for */ 8314 matchname = vim_strsave(s); 8315 8316 /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more 8317 * is following then find matches without any directory. */ 8318 if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2 8319 && *path_end == '/') 8320 { 8321 STRCPY(s, path_end + 1); 8322 ++stardepth; 8323 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE); 8324 --stardepth; 8325 } 8326 8327 /* Scan all files in the directory with "dir/ *.*" */ 8328 STRCPY(s, "*.*"); 8329 #ifdef WIN3264 8330 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8331 if (enc_codepage >= 0 && (int)GetACP() != enc_codepage) 8332 { 8333 /* The active codepage differs from 'encoding'. Attempt using the 8334 * wide function. If it fails because it is not implemented fall back 8335 * to the non-wide version (for Windows 98) */ 8336 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL); 8337 if (wn != NULL) 8338 { 8339 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb); 8340 if (hFind == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE 8341 && GetLastError() == ERROR_CALL_NOT_IMPLEMENTED) 8342 { 8343 vim_free(wn); 8344 wn = NULL; 8345 } 8346 } 8347 } 8348 8349 if (wn == NULL) 8350 # endif 8351 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb); 8352 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE); 8353 #else 8354 /* If we are expanding wildcards we try both files and directories */ 8355 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb, 8356 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0); 8357 #endif 8358 8359 while (ok) 8360 { 8361 #ifdef WIN3264 8362 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8363 if (wn != NULL) 8364 p = ucs2_to_enc(wfb.cFileName, NULL); /* p is allocated here */ 8365 else 8366 # endif 8367 p = (char_u *)fb.cFileName; 8368 #else 8369 p = (char_u *)fb.ff_name; 8370 #endif 8371 /* Ignore entries starting with a dot, unless when asked for. Accept 8372 * all entries found with "matchname". */ 8373 if ((p[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot) 8374 && (matchname == NULL 8375 || vim_regexec(®match, p, (colnr_T)0))) 8376 { 8377 #ifdef WIN3264 8378 STRCPY(s, p); 8379 #else 8380 namelowcpy(s, p); 8381 #endif 8382 len = (int)STRLEN(buf); 8383 8384 if (starstar && stardepth < 100) 8385 { 8386 /* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to 8387 * find matches. */ 8388 STRCPY(buf + len, "/**"); 8389 STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end); 8390 ++stardepth; 8391 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE); 8392 --stardepth; 8393 } 8394 8395 STRCPY(buf + len, path_end); 8396 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end)) 8397 { 8398 /* need to expand another component of the path */ 8399 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */ 8400 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE); 8401 } 8402 else 8403 { 8404 /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */ 8405 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */ 8406 if (*path_end != 0) 8407 backslash_halve(buf + len + 1); 8408 if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0) /* add existing file */ 8409 addfile(gap, buf, flags); 8410 } 8411 } 8412 8413 #ifdef WIN3264 8414 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8415 if (wn != NULL) 8416 { 8417 vim_free(p); 8418 ok = FindNextFileW(hFind, &wfb); 8419 } 8420 else 8421 # endif 8422 ok = FindNextFile(hFind, &fb); 8423 #else 8424 ok = (findnext(&fb) == 0); 8425 #endif 8426 8427 /* If no more matches and no match was used, try expanding the name 8428 * itself. Finds the long name of a short filename. */ 8429 if (!ok && matchname != NULL && gap->ga_len == start_len) 8430 { 8431 STRCPY(s, matchname); 8432 #ifdef WIN3264 8433 FindClose(hFind); 8434 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8435 if (wn != NULL) 8436 { 8437 vim_free(wn); 8438 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL); 8439 if (wn != NULL) 8440 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb); 8441 } 8442 if (wn == NULL) 8443 # endif 8444 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb); 8445 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE); 8446 #else 8447 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb, 8448 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0); 8449 #endif 8450 vim_free(matchname); 8451 matchname = NULL; 8452 } 8453 } 8454 8455 #ifdef WIN3264 8456 FindClose(hFind); 8457 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8458 vim_free(wn); 8459 # endif 8460 #endif 8461 vim_free(buf); 8462 vim_free(regmatch.regprog); 8463 vim_free(matchname); 8464 8465 matches = gap->ga_len - start_len; 8466 if (matches > 0) 8467 qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, (size_t)matches, 8468 sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp); 8469 return matches; 8470 } 8471 8472 int 8473 mch_expandpath( 8474 garray_T *gap, 8475 char_u *path, 8476 int flags) /* EW_* flags */ 8477 { 8478 return dos_expandpath(gap, path, 0, flags, FALSE); 8479 } 8480 # endif /* MSDOS || FEAT_GUI_W16 || WIN3264 */ 8481 8482 #if (defined(UNIX) && !defined(VMS)) || defined(USE_UNIXFILENAME) \ 8483 || defined(PROTO) 8484 /* 8485 * Unix style wildcard expansion code. 8486 * It's here because it's used both for Unix and Mac. 8487 */ 8488 static int pstrcmp __ARGS((const void *, const void *)); 8489 8490 static int 8491 pstrcmp(a, b) 8492 const void *a, *b; 8493 { 8494 return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1)); 8495 } 8496 8497 /* 8498 * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or 8499 * directories. Adds matches to "gap". Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc. 8500 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting 8501 * at "path + wildoff". 8502 * Return the number of matches found. 8503 * NOTE: much of this is identical to dos_expandpath(), keep in sync! 8504 */ 8505 int 8506 unix_expandpath(gap, path, wildoff, flags, didstar) 8507 garray_T *gap; 8508 char_u *path; 8509 int wildoff; 8510 int flags; /* EW_* flags */ 8511 int didstar; /* expanded "**" once already */ 8512 { 8513 char_u *buf; 8514 char_u *path_end; 8515 char_u *p, *s, *e; 8516 int start_len = gap->ga_len; 8517 char_u *pat; 8518 regmatch_T regmatch; 8519 int starts_with_dot; 8520 int matches; 8521 int len; 8522 int starstar = FALSE; 8523 static int stardepth = 0; /* depth for "**" expansion */ 8524 8525 DIR *dirp; 8526 struct dirent *dp; 8527 8528 /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */ 8529 if (stardepth > 0) 8530 { 8531 ui_breakcheck(); 8532 if (got_int) 8533 return 0; 8534 } 8535 8536 /* make room for file name */ 8537 buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5); 8538 if (buf == NULL) 8539 return 0; 8540 8541 /* 8542 * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard. 8543 * Copy it into "buf", including the preceding characters. 8544 */ 8545 p = buf; 8546 s = buf; 8547 e = NULL; 8548 path_end = path; 8549 while (*path_end != NUL) 8550 { 8551 /* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will 8552 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */ 8553 if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end)) 8554 *p++ = *path_end++; 8555 else if (*path_end == '/') 8556 { 8557 if (e != NULL) 8558 break; 8559 s = p + 1; 8560 } 8561 else if (path_end >= path + wildoff 8562 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[{~$", *path_end) != NULL) 8563 e = p; 8564 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8565 if (has_mbyte) 8566 { 8567 len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end); 8568 STRNCPY(p, path_end, len); 8569 p += len; 8570 path_end += len; 8571 } 8572 else 8573 #endif 8574 *p++ = *path_end++; 8575 } 8576 e = p; 8577 *e = NUL; 8578 8579 /* now we have one wildcard component between "s" and "e" */ 8580 /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard 8581 * component. */ 8582 for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p) 8583 if (rem_backslash(p)) 8584 { 8585 STRCPY(p, p + 1); 8586 --e; 8587 --s; 8588 } 8589 8590 /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */ 8591 for (p = s; p < e; ++p) 8592 if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*') 8593 starstar = TRUE; 8594 8595 /* convert the file pattern to a regexp pattern */ 8596 starts_with_dot = (*s == '.'); 8597 pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE); 8598 if (pat == NULL) 8599 { 8600 vim_free(buf); 8601 return 0; 8602 } 8603 8604 /* compile the regexp into a program */ 8605 #ifdef CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME 8606 regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE; /* Behave like Terminal.app */ 8607 #else 8608 regmatch.rm_ic = FALSE; /* Don't ever ignore case */ 8609 #endif 8610 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC); 8611 vim_free(pat); 8612 8613 if (regmatch.regprog == NULL) 8614 { 8615 vim_free(buf); 8616 return 0; 8617 } 8618 8619 /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more 8620 * is following then find matches without any directory. */ 8621 if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2 8622 && *path_end == '/') 8623 { 8624 STRCPY(s, path_end + 1); 8625 ++stardepth; 8626 (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE); 8627 --stardepth; 8628 } 8629 8630 /* open the directory for scanning */ 8631 *s = NUL; 8632 dirp = opendir(*buf == NUL ? "." : (char *)buf); 8633 8634 /* Find all matching entries */ 8635 if (dirp != NULL) 8636 { 8637 for (;;) 8638 { 8639 dp = readdir(dirp); 8640 if (dp == NULL) 8641 break; 8642 if ((dp->d_name[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot) 8643 && vim_regexec(®match, (char_u *)dp->d_name, (colnr_T)0)) 8644 { 8645 STRCPY(s, dp->d_name); 8646 len = STRLEN(buf); 8647 8648 if (starstar && stardepth < 100) 8649 { 8650 /* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to 8651 * find matches. */ 8652 STRCPY(buf + len, "/**"); 8653 STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end); 8654 ++stardepth; 8655 (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE); 8656 --stardepth; 8657 } 8658 8659 STRCPY(buf + len, path_end); 8660 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end)) /* handle more wildcards */ 8661 { 8662 /* need to expand another component of the path */ 8663 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */ 8664 (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE); 8665 } 8666 else 8667 { 8668 /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */ 8669 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */ 8670 if (*path_end != NUL) 8671 backslash_halve(buf + len + 1); 8672 if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0) /* add existing file */ 8673 { 8674 #if defined(MACOS_X) && defined(FEAT_MBYTE) 8675 size_t precomp_len = STRLEN(buf)+1; 8676 char_u *precomp_buf = 8677 mac_precompose_path(buf, precomp_len, &precomp_len); 8678 if (precomp_buf) 8679 { 8680 mch_memmove(buf, precomp_buf, precomp_len); 8681 vim_free(precomp_buf); 8682 } 8683 #endif 8684 addfile(gap, buf, flags); 8685 } 8686 } 8687 } 8688 } 8689 8690 closedir(dirp); 8691 } 8692 8693 vim_free(buf); 8694 vim_free(regmatch.regprog); 8695 8696 matches = gap->ga_len - start_len; 8697 if (matches > 0) 8698 qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, matches, 8699 sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp); 8700 return matches; 8701 } 8702 #endif 8703 8704 /* 8705 * Generic wildcard expansion code. 8706 * 8707 * Characters in "pat" that should not be expanded must be preceded with a 8708 * backslash. E.g., "/path\ with\ spaces/my\*star*" 8709 * 8710 * Return FAIL when no single file was found. In this case "num_file" is not 8711 * set, and "file" may contain an error message. 8712 * Return OK when some files found. "num_file" is set to the number of 8713 * matches, "file" to the array of matches. Call FreeWild() later. 8714 */ 8715 int 8716 gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags) 8717 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */ 8718 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */ 8719 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */ 8720 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */ 8721 int flags; /* EW_* flags */ 8722 { 8723 int i; 8724 garray_T ga; 8725 char_u *p; 8726 static int recursive = FALSE; 8727 int add_pat; 8728 8729 /* 8730 * expand_env() is called to expand things like "~user". If this fails, 8731 * it calls ExpandOne(), which brings us back here. In this case, always 8732 * call the machine specific expansion function, if possible. Otherwise, 8733 * return FAIL. 8734 */ 8735 if (recursive) 8736 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR 8737 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags); 8738 #else 8739 return FAIL; 8740 #endif 8741 8742 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR 8743 /* 8744 * If there are any special wildcard characters which we cannot handle 8745 * here, call machine specific function for all the expansion. This 8746 * avoids starting the shell for each argument separately. 8747 * For `=expr` do use the internal function. 8748 */ 8749 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; i++) 8750 { 8751 if (vim_strpbrk(pat[i], (char_u *)SPECIAL_WILDCHAR) != NULL 8752 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK 8753 && !(vim_backtick(pat[i]) && pat[i][1] == '=') 8754 # endif 8755 ) 8756 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags); 8757 } 8758 #endif 8759 8760 recursive = TRUE; 8761 8762 /* 8763 * The matching file names are stored in a growarray. Init it empty. 8764 */ 8765 ga_init2(&ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 30); 8766 8767 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; ++i) 8768 { 8769 add_pat = -1; 8770 p = pat[i]; 8771 8772 #ifdef VIM_BACKTICK 8773 if (vim_backtick(p)) 8774 add_pat = expand_backtick(&ga, p, flags); 8775 else 8776 #endif 8777 { 8778 /* 8779 * First expand environment variables, "~/" and "~user/". 8780 */ 8781 if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL) 8782 { 8783 p = expand_env_save(p); 8784 if (p == NULL) 8785 p = pat[i]; 8786 #ifdef UNIX 8787 /* 8788 * On Unix, if expand_env() can't expand an environment 8789 * variable, use the shell to do that. Discard previously 8790 * found file names and start all over again. 8791 */ 8792 else if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL) 8793 { 8794 vim_free(p); 8795 ga_clear(&ga); 8796 i = mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, 8797 flags); 8798 recursive = FALSE; 8799 return i; 8800 } 8801 #endif 8802 } 8803 8804 /* 8805 * If there are wildcards: Expand file names and add each match to 8806 * the list. If there is no match, and EW_NOTFOUND is given, add 8807 * the pattern. 8808 * If there are no wildcards: Add the file name if it exists or 8809 * when EW_NOTFOUND is given. 8810 */ 8811 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(p)) 8812 add_pat = mch_expandpath(&ga, p, flags); 8813 } 8814 8815 if (add_pat == -1 || (add_pat == 0 && (flags & EW_NOTFOUND))) 8816 { 8817 char_u *t = backslash_halve_save(p); 8818 8819 #if defined(MACOS_CLASSIC) 8820 slash_to_colon(t); 8821 #endif 8822 /* When EW_NOTFOUND is used, always add files and dirs. Makes 8823 * "vim c:/" work. */ 8824 if (flags & EW_NOTFOUND) 8825 addfile(&ga, t, flags | EW_DIR | EW_FILE); 8826 else if (mch_getperm(t) >= 0) 8827 addfile(&ga, t, flags); 8828 vim_free(t); 8829 } 8830 8831 if (p != pat[i]) 8832 vim_free(p); 8833 } 8834 8835 *num_file = ga.ga_len; 8836 *file = (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? (char_u **)ga.ga_data : (char_u **)""; 8837 8838 recursive = FALSE; 8839 8840 return (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? OK : FAIL; 8841 } 8842 8843 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK 8844 8845 /* 8846 * Return TRUE if we can expand this backtick thing here. 8847 */ 8848 static int 8849 vim_backtick(p) 8850 char_u *p; 8851 { 8852 return (*p == '`' && *(p + 1) != NUL && *(p + STRLEN(p) - 1) == '`'); 8853 } 8854 8855 /* 8856 * Expand an item in `backticks` by executing it as a command. 8857 * Currently only works when pat[] starts and ends with a `. 8858 * Returns number of file names found. 8859 */ 8860 static int 8861 expand_backtick(gap, pat, flags) 8862 garray_T *gap; 8863 char_u *pat; 8864 int flags; /* EW_* flags */ 8865 { 8866 char_u *p; 8867 char_u *cmd; 8868 char_u *buffer; 8869 int cnt = 0; 8870 int i; 8871 8872 /* Create the command: lop off the backticks. */ 8873 cmd = vim_strnsave(pat + 1, (int)STRLEN(pat) - 2); 8874 if (cmd == NULL) 8875 return 0; 8876 8877 #ifdef FEAT_EVAL 8878 if (*cmd == '=') /* `={expr}`: Expand expression */ 8879 buffer = eval_to_string(cmd + 1, &p); 8880 else 8881 #endif 8882 buffer = get_cmd_output(cmd, NULL, 8883 (flags & EW_SILENT) ? SHELL_SILENT : 0); 8884 vim_free(cmd); 8885 if (buffer == NULL) 8886 return 0; 8887 8888 cmd = buffer; 8889 while (*cmd != NUL) 8890 { 8891 cmd = skipwhite(cmd); /* skip over white space */ 8892 p = cmd; 8893 while (*p != NUL && *p != '\r' && *p != '\n') /* skip over entry */ 8894 ++p; 8895 /* add an entry if it is not empty */ 8896 if (p > cmd) 8897 { 8898 i = *p; 8899 *p = NUL; 8900 addfile(gap, cmd, flags); 8901 *p = i; 8902 ++cnt; 8903 } 8904 cmd = p; 8905 while (*cmd != NUL && (*cmd == '\r' || *cmd == '\n')) 8906 ++cmd; 8907 } 8908 8909 vim_free(buffer); 8910 return cnt; 8911 } 8912 # endif /* VIM_BACKTICK */ 8913 8914 /* 8915 * Add a file to a file list. Accepted flags: 8916 * EW_DIR add directories 8917 * EW_FILE add files 8918 * EW_NOTFOUND add even when it doesn't exist 8919 * EW_ADDSLASH add slash after directory name 8920 */ 8921 void 8922 addfile(gap, f, flags) 8923 garray_T *gap; 8924 char_u *f; /* filename */ 8925 int flags; 8926 { 8927 char_u *p; 8928 int isdir; 8929 8930 /* if the file/dir doesn't exist, may not add it */ 8931 if (!(flags & EW_NOTFOUND) && mch_getperm(f) < 0) 8932 return; 8933 8934 #ifdef FNAME_ILLEGAL 8935 /* if the file/dir contains illegal characters, don't add it */ 8936 if (vim_strpbrk(f, (char_u *)FNAME_ILLEGAL) != NULL) 8937 return; 8938 #endif 8939 8940 isdir = mch_isdir(f); 8941 if ((isdir && !(flags & EW_DIR)) || (!isdir && !(flags & EW_FILE))) 8942 return; 8943 8944 /* Make room for another item in the file list. */ 8945 if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL) 8946 return; 8947 8948 p = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(f) + 1 + isdir)); 8949 if (p == NULL) 8950 return; 8951 8952 STRCPY(p, f); 8953 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME 8954 slash_adjust(p); 8955 #endif 8956 /* 8957 * Append a slash or backslash after directory names if none is present. 8958 */ 8959 #ifndef DONT_ADD_PATHSEP_TO_DIR 8960 if (isdir && (flags & EW_ADDSLASH)) 8961 add_pathsep(p); 8962 #endif 8963 ((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p; 8964 } 8965 #endif /* !NO_EXPANDPATH */ 8966 8967 #if defined(VIM_BACKTICK) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO) 8968 8969 #ifndef SEEK_SET 8970 # define SEEK_SET 0 8971 #endif 8972 #ifndef SEEK_END 8973 # define SEEK_END 2 8974 #endif 8975 8976 /* 8977 * Get the stdout of an external command. 8978 * Returns an allocated string, or NULL for error. 8979 */ 8980 char_u * 8981 get_cmd_output(cmd, infile, flags) 8982 char_u *cmd; 8983 char_u *infile; /* optional input file name */ 8984 int flags; /* can be SHELL_SILENT */ 8985 { 8986 char_u *tempname; 8987 char_u *command; 8988 char_u *buffer = NULL; 8989 int len; 8990 int i = 0; 8991 FILE *fd; 8992 8993 if (check_restricted() || check_secure()) 8994 return NULL; 8995 8996 /* get a name for the temp file */ 8997 if ((tempname = vim_tempname('o')) == NULL) 8998 { 8999 EMSG(_(e_notmp)); 9000 return NULL; 9001 } 9002 9003 /* Add the redirection stuff */ 9004 command = make_filter_cmd(cmd, infile, tempname); 9005 if (command == NULL) 9006 goto done; 9007 9008 /* 9009 * Call the shell to execute the command (errors are ignored). 9010 * Don't check timestamps here. 9011 */ 9012 ++no_check_timestamps; 9013 call_shell(command, SHELL_DOOUT | SHELL_EXPAND | flags); 9014 --no_check_timestamps; 9015 9016 vim_free(command); 9017 9018 /* 9019 * read the names from the file into memory 9020 */ 9021 # ifdef VMS 9022 /* created temporary file is not allways readable as binary */ 9023 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, "r"); 9024 # else 9025 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, READBIN); 9026 # endif 9027 9028 if (fd == NULL) 9029 { 9030 EMSG2(_(e_notopen), tempname); 9031 goto done; 9032 } 9033 9034 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_END); 9035 len = ftell(fd); /* get size of temp file */ 9036 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_SET); 9037 9038 buffer = alloc(len + 1); 9039 if (buffer != NULL) 9040 i = (int)fread((char *)buffer, (size_t)1, (size_t)len, fd); 9041 fclose(fd); 9042 mch_remove(tempname); 9043 if (buffer == NULL) 9044 goto done; 9045 #ifdef VMS 9046 len = i; /* VMS doesn't give us what we asked for... */ 9047 #endif 9048 if (i != len) 9049 { 9050 EMSG2(_(e_notread), tempname); 9051 vim_free(buffer); 9052 buffer = NULL; 9053 } 9054 else 9055 buffer[len] = '\0'; /* make sure the buffer is terminated */ 9056 9057 done: 9058 vim_free(tempname); 9059 return buffer; 9060 } 9061 #endif 9062 9063 /* 9064 * Free the list of files returned by expand_wildcards() or other expansion 9065 * functions. 9066 */ 9067 void 9068 FreeWild(count, files) 9069 int count; 9070 char_u **files; 9071 { 9072 if (files == NULL || count <= 0) 9073 return; 9074 #if defined(__EMX__) && defined(__ALWAYS_HAS_TRAILING_NULL_POINTER) /* XXX */ 9075 /* 9076 * Is this still OK for when other functions than expand_wildcards() have 9077 * been used??? 9078 */ 9079 _fnexplodefree((char **)files); 9080 #else 9081 while (count--) 9082 vim_free(files[count]); 9083 vim_free(files); 9084 #endif 9085 } 9086 9087 /* 9088 * return TRUE when need to go to Insert mode because of 'insertmode'. 9089 * Don't do this when still processing a command or a mapping. 9090 * Don't do this when inside a ":normal" command. 9091 */ 9092 int 9093 goto_im() 9094 { 9095 return (p_im && stuff_empty() && typebuf_typed()); 9096 } 9097